Integra RDC 7.1 User Manual To The 1797e61f C155 4025 A7a0 3aacfb78b8b7

User Manual: Integra RDC-7.1 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 156 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

Instruction Manual

Important Safety Instructions

1. Read these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all warnings.

4. Follow all instructions.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with dry cloth.

7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radia-

tors, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus

(including ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two

blades with one wider than the other. A grounding

type plug has two blades and a third grounding

prong. The wide blade or the third prong are pro-

vided for your safety. If the provided plug does not

ﬁt into your outlet, consult an electrician for

replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience recepta-

cles, and the point where they exit from the appara-

tus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by the

manufacturer.

12.

Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table spec-

iﬁed by the manufacturer, or

sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use cau-

tion when moving the cart/

apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or

when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or

plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects

have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has

been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate

normally, or has been dropped.

15. Damage Requiring Service

Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer

servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel under the

following conditions:

A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen

into the apparatus,

C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or

water,

D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by

following the operating instructions. Adjust only

those controls that are covered by the operating

instructions as an improper adjustment of other

controls may result in damage and will often

require extensive work by a qualiﬁed technician

to restore the apparatus to its normal operation,

E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in

any way, and

F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in

performance this indicates a need for service.

16. Object and Liquid Entry

Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus

through openings as they may touch dangerous volt-

age points or short-out parts that could result in a

ﬁre or electric shock.

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or

splashing and no objects ﬁlled with liquids, such as

vases shall be placed on the apparatus.

Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of

this unit.

17. Batteries

Always consider the environmental issues and fol-

low local regulations when disposing of batteries.

18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,

such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is ade-

quate ventilation.

Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides

and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf

or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4")

away from the rear panel or wall, creating a ﬂue-like

gap for warm air to escape.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS

TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO

USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER

SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE

PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is

intended to alert the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE

NE PAS

OUVRIR

AVIS

PORTABLE CART WARNING

S3125A

Thank you

for purchasing an Integra Research AV Controller.

Please read this manual thoroughly before making connections and plugging in the unit. Following the instructions in

this manual will enable you to obtain optimum performance and listening enjoyment from your new AV Controller.

Please retain this manual for future reference.

Precautions

1. Recording Copyright

Unless it’s for personal use only, recording copyrighted

material is illegal without permission of the copyright holder.

2. AC Fuse

The AC fuse inside the RDC-7.1 is not user-serviceable. If

you cannot turn on the RDC-7.1, contact your Onkyo dealer.

3. Care

Occasionally you should dust the RDC-7.1 all over with a

soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft cloth dampened

with a weak solution of mild detergent and water. Dry the

RDC-7.1 immediately afterwards with a clean cloth. Don’t

use abrasive cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical

solvents, because they may damage the ﬁnish or remove

the panel lettering.

4. Power

WARNING

BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST

TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULLY.

AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. Make sure

that the voltage in your area meets the voltage requirements

printed on the RDC-7.1’s rear panel (e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or

AC 120 V, 60 Hz).

The Worldwide model has a voltage selector for compatibility

with power systems around the world. Before you plug in this

model, make sure that the voltage selector is set to the correct

voltage for your area.

For USA, Canadian, and Australian models

Setting the [STANDBY/ON] switch to STANDBY does not

fully shutdown the RDC-7.1. If you do not intend to use the

RDC-7.1 for an extended period, remove the power cord from

the AC outlet.

For British Models

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply

cord of this unit should be performed only by qualiﬁed service

personnel.

IMPORTANT

The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with

the following code:

Blue: Neutral

Brown: Live

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the

terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the termi-

nal that is marked with the letter N or coloured black.

The wire that is coloured brown must be connected to the ter-

minal that is marked with the letter L or coloured red.

IMPORTANT

The plug is ﬁtted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse needs to

be replaced, the replacement fuse must be approved by ASTA

or BSI to BS1362 and have the same ampere rating as that

indicated on the plug. Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI

mark on the body of the fuse.

IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR

THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE

FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF

AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A DANGER OF

SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG

IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMPERE SOCKET.

If in any doubt, consult a qualiﬁed electrician.

For U.S. Models

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Section 820-40 of the NEC which provides guide-

lines for proper grounding and, in particular, speciﬁes that the

cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the

building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC Information for User

CAUTION:

User changes or modiﬁcations not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits

for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre-

quency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-

ence will not occur in a particular installation. If this equip-

ment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment

off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following measures:

•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

•Increase the separation between the equipment and the

receiver.

•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

•Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

For Canadian Models

NOTE:

THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH

CANADIAN ICES-003.

RSS 210, Low Power Licence-Exempt Radiocommunications

Devices (All FrequencyBands).

For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE

OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

Modèle Canadien

REMARQUE:

CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA CLASSE B EST

CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-003 DU CANADA.

CNR-210, Dispositifs de radiocommunications de faible

puissance, exempts de licence (pour toutes les bandes de

fréquences).

Sur les modèles dont la ﬁche est polarisée:

ATTENTION:

POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE

LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA

BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER

JUSQU’AU FOND.

Getting Started

Table of Contents

Important Safety Instructions ..........................2

Precautions........................................................3

Features .............................................................6

Supplied Accessories .......................................8

Connecting the Supplied Power Cord ............ 8

Before Using the RDC-7.1.................................9

Installing the Batteries .................................... 9

Using the Remote Controller .......................... 9

Index Parts and Facilities ...............................10

Front Panel ................................................... 10

Inner Panel ................................................... 12

Rear Panel.................................................... 14

Front Panel Display ...................................... 15

Remote Controller (Amp Mode).................... 16

Speaker Placement .........................................18

Basic Speaker Placements for Home Theater

and the Function of Respective Speakers

... 18

Placing the Speakers.................................... 19

Speaker Placement Suitable for THX Audio

.... 20

Speaker Placement Suitable for a Music

Source such as DVD-Audio ....................... 20

Available Speaker Placements According

to the Number of Speakers ........................ 21

Connection Examples................................... 22

Connecting a Power Amplifier .......................25

Connecting a Power Amplifier Using RCA

Type Cables ............................................... 25

Connecting a Power Amplifier Using XLR

Type Cables ............................................... 26

Using Bi-amp Connection............................. 27

Connecting Antennas .....................................28

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna.............. 28

Connecting the AM Loop Antenna................ 29

Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna............ 29

Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna............ 29

Connecting AV Components..........................30

Types of Connection Cables and Terminals

.... 30

Connecting Monitors such as TV or Projector

... 32

Connecting a DVD Player............................. 33

Connecting a DVD Recorder or Digital VCR

(VIDEO 1)................................................... 34

Connecting a VCR (VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3) ...... 35

Connecting a DBS Tuner, DBS TV, or

BS/CS Tuner .............................................. 37

Connecting a CD Player, Turntable or Tuner

.... 38

Connecting a Recording Device such as MD

Recorder, DAT Deck, CD Recorder or

Cassette Deck............................................ 39

Connection Using the i.LINK (AUDIO)

Terminal ( ) (Other than Chinese model)

... 40

Connection Using HDMI Terminals .............. 43

Connecting -compatible AV Components

...45

Connections for Remote Control ( ) ......... 45

Connecting Components not Reached by

the Remote Controller Signals (IR IN)

– USA and Canadian models –...................46

If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach

the RDC-7.1 Remote Sensor ..................... 46

Using an External Device with 12V Trigger

Terminal – USA and Canadian models –...47

Connecting Components not Reached by the

Remote Controller Signals (IR IN/OUT)

– Other than USA and Canadian models –

...48

If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach

the RDC-7.1 Remote Sensor...................... 48

If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach

Other Components ..................................... 49

Using an External Device with 12V Trigger

Terminal – Other than USA and Canadian

models – ...................................................... 49

Basic Operation of Remote Controller

Buttons ........................................................ 50

To Operate the RDC-7.1 (AMP Mode).......... 50

To Select an Input Source............................. 50

To Operate a Connected Component

(Mode Switching)........................................51

To Select a Source in Zone 2 or Zone 3 ....... 51

To Perform a Macro Operation ..................... 51

Customizing Your Remote Controller............ 51

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations ..... 52

Turning on the Power.................................... 52

Operating on the RDC-7.1 ............................ 52

Turning on the Power from the Remote

Controller .................................................... 53

Operating with Remote Controller................. 53

Using the Listening Modes ............................ 58

Selecting the Listening Mode........................ 61

Listening to Radio Broadcasts...................... 62

Using the Tuner............................................. 62

Tuning into a Radio Station........................... 62

Listening to RDS Broadcasts

(European models only) ............................. 64

Listening to RDS Broadcasts ........................ 64

PTY Program Types in Europe ..................... 64

Displaying Radio Text (RT) ........................... 65

Performing a PTY Scan ................................ 65

Performing a TP Scan................................... 65

Enjoying Multichannel Playback ................... 66

How to Connect............................................. 66

How to Set Up............................................... 66

Playing Back in Multichannel Sound............. 67

Adjusting the Volume Level of Speakers

for Multichannel Playback........................... 67

Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote

Zone (Zone 2/3) ........................................... 68

Connecting and Setup................................... 68

Enjoying Movies and Music in a Remote

Zone ........................................................... 69

Recording a Source........................................ 71

Recording Audio/Video While Playing........... 72

Recording Audio/Video on a Component

While Playing Another ................................ 72

Recording the Video from one Source and

the Audio from Another Source .................. 73

Connecting Net Audio – USA, Canada, and

Australian models –.................................... 74

About Net-Tune............................................. 74

Networking Your RDC-7.1............................. 75

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA,

Canada, and Australian models – ............. 76

About Net-Tune............................................. 76

Networking Your RDC-7.1............................. 77

About Network Configuration ........................ 77

Getting Started

Installation and Connections

Operations

Table of Contents

—Continued

Using the Remote Controller.........................78

Enjoying Internet Radio.................................80

Playing a Music File Saved on the Net-Tune

Server .........................................................82

Configuring the Music Server........................84

Setup Menu...................................................... 86

OSD Map (MAIN A).......................................86

OSD Map (MAIN B).......................................88

OSD Map (ZONE 2) ......................................89

Navigating the Setup Menu...........................90

Hardware Setup............................................... 91

Remote Control Setup Sub-menu .................91

TV Format Sub-menu....................................91

AM Frequency Setup Sub-menu

(Asian and Australian Models Only) ...........91

Speaker/Output Setup ....................................92

Speaker Configuration Sub-menu.................92

Speaker Crossover Sub-menu......................93

Speaker Distance Sub-menu ........................93

Notch Filter Sub-menu ..................................93

Level Calibration Sub-menu..........................94

THX Audio Setup Sub-menu.........................94

Audio Output Assign Sub-menu....................95

Video Output Assign Sub-menu....................96

Input Setup ......................................................97

Audio Assign Sub-menu (when input is other

than NET AUDIO).......................................98

Music Server Sub-menu (When input is NET

AUDIO) .......................................................99

Video Assign Sub-menu................................99

Listening Mode Preset Sub-menu...............100

Character Edit Sub-menu............................101

IntelliVolume Sub-menu ..............................102

Delay Sub-menu .........................................102

12V Trigger Assign Sub-menu ....................102

Listening Mode Setup................................... 103

Mono Setup Sub-menu ...............................103

Multiplex Setup Sub-menu ..........................103

Stereo Setup Sub-menu..............................104

Direct, Pure Audio Setup Sub-menu ...........105

Multichannel Input Setup Sub-menu ...........105

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio Input Setup

Sub-menu .................................................107

i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD Input Setup

Sub-menu .................................................108

Dolby Digital Setup Sub-menu ....................109

DTS Setup Sub-menu .................................110

AAC Setup Sub-menu.................................111

Dolby Pro Logic IIx/DTS NEO:6

(2ch Input only) Setup Sub-menu.............113

THX Setup Sub-menu .................................114

Mono Movie Setup/Enhance Setup/Orchestra

Setup/Unplugged Setup/Studio-Mix Setup/

TV Logic Setup Sub-menu .......................115

All Ch Stereo Setup/Full Mono Setup

Sub-menu .................................................116

Dolby Virtual Speaker Setup Sub-menu .....117

Dolby Headphone Setup Sub-menu ...........118

Audio Adjust.................................................. 119

Tone Control Sub-menu..............................119

Preference ..................................................... 120

Volume Setup Sub-menu ............................120

Headphone Level Setup Sub-menu ............120

OSD Setup Sub-menu................................ 120

OSD Position Sub-menu ............................ 120

i.LINK Setup ...................................................121

Wakeup Setup ............................................ 121

OSD for DVD .............................................. 121

OSD for DVD (Zone 2) ............................... 121

System Control Setup................................. 121

Network Setup ...............................................122

IP Address Sub-menu ................................ 122

Proxy Sub-menu......................................... 122

MAC

Address Sub-menu ............................ 122

Client Sub-menu......................................... 123

Lock/Version Setup.......................................123

Lock Setup Sub-menu ................................ 123

Firmware Version Sub-menu...................... 123

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo

Products Using the Remote Controller ...124

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo

Products Using the Connection ........ 124

DVD Mode .................................................. 124

CD Mode .................................................... 126

MiniDisc Mode ............................................ 127

Tape Mode ................................................. 128

Using the Remote Controller with Other

Components...............................................129

Entering a Remote Control Code ............... 129

Learning Commands from Another Remote

Controller.................................................. 136

Using Macros.............................................. 137

Other Settings for the Remote Controller ...139

Editing Remote Controller Modes............... 139

Resetting the Remote Controller ................ 141

Using the Remote Controller with Radio

Frequency (RC-555M only)...................... 141

Changing the Remote Controller’s

Control ID ...................................................142

Relationship Between Input Source and

Listening Mode ..........................................143

Using the RDC-7.1 with Option Boards – USA,

Canada, and Australian models only –

......146

Types of the RDC-7.1 Option Boards......... 146

Installing the Option Boards (USA and

Australian Models Only)........................... 148

Troubleshooting ............................................149

Power ......................................................... 149

Audio .......................................................... 149

Video .......................................................... 150

Tuner .......................................................... 150

Remote Controller ...................................... 150

Recording ................................................... 151

Zone 2/Zone 3 ............................................ 151

Net-Tune..................................................... 151

Others......................................................... 151

Error Messages .......................................... 152

Specifications

– USA and Canadian models –.................152

Specifications – Other than USA and

Canadian models –....................................154

Setup Menu

Using the Remote Controller

Miscellaneous

Features

Ampliﬁer Features

• 192 kHz/24-Bit DAC for All Channels

• Apogee Master Clock

—the best in the industry—for

the highest quality D/A conversion available

• 8 Balanced XLR Outputs

for the highest, most

stable, noise-free signal transfer possible

• Color-Coded 7.1 Multi-Channel Inputs and Pre

Outs

• 5 12V DC Trigger Outputs and 3 IR Inputs/

Outputs

Audio/Video Features

• THX Ultra2 Certiﬁed

•

THX Surround EX, DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix 6.1,

DTS NEO:6, DTS 96/24, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby

Pro Logic II/IIx, Dolby Headphone, Dolby Virtual

Surround

• 4 Wideband Component Video Inputs and 2

Output*

•

Dual Monitor Outputs

(S Video/Composite) to

route the onscreen signal to a small monitor and make

adjustments without distracting the audience

•

12 Digital Inputs

(6 Optical/6 Coaxial/12

Assignable) to connect any variety of digital sources

to the RDC-7.1’s powerful digital processor

•

4 Digital Outputs

(2 Optical/2 Coaxial/4 Assignable)

to make direct digital dubs to other digital devices

•

Wolfson 192 kHz/24-Bit

D/A Converters for all

channels

•

Dual 32-Bit DSP Chips

for high grade main and

multizone decoding

• Non-Scaling Conﬁguration

Next Generation User Interface

• HDMI (High Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface)*

• i.Link (IEEE1394) Digital Input for DVD-Audio

and SACD

• Net-Tune Function with MP3/WAV/WMA

Decoding*

• Ethernet Plug-In Capability and 1 Output*

• Bi-Directional RS-232 Port to download new

programs and provide easy interface with

touchscreen controllers from other manufacturers

• Composite and S Video to Component Video*

Upconversion (NTSC and PAL Compatible)

• Speaker A and B Mode for 7.1 Channels

• Bi-Wiring Connectable for FL/FR with SBR/SBL

• Dual 32-Bit DSP Chips for high grade main and

multizone decoding

•

5 12V DC Trigger Outputs and 3 IR Inputs/

Outputs

for multizone operation of multiple

components

• Individual Crossover Adjustment

FM/AM Tuner Features

• 40 FM/AM Presets*

• FM/AM Auto Tuning*

Other Performance Features

• VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry)

•

Solid Aluminum Volume Knob

for quality you can

feel—ergonomically pleasing and convenient for

those quick in-the-dark level changes

•

Separate PC Boards

to keep audio and video signals

completely separate

•

Rec Out Selector (On Front)

to tape one program

while watching or listening to another

•

Gold-Plated RCA Jacks

to resist corrosion and

provide distortion-free signal transmission

•

Impeccable Quality Materials

—a heavy gauge,

reinforced steel chassis, rigid aluminum panels and

brazen stabilizers to enhance overall chassis stability

•

Large Multi-Emitter Output Transistors

to provide

faster switching speed, which translates into a wider

dynamic range

•

Zone 2 Multiroom/Multisource

(audio and video) to

set up additional rooms

•

Detachable Heavy Duty IEC Power Cord

minimize interference from external sources and

increase power stability—detachable for ease of

installation

• Motorized Control Door

• Audiophile Grade Parts

• IntelliVolume

• Pure Audio Mode

• Digital Upsampling

• Absolute Ground Plate

• Large, Fluorescent, 35 Dot Matrix Display With

4 Mode Dimmer

• For Ultimate Control—The Last Remote You’ll

Ever Need

• A-Form Listening Mode Memory

In catalogs and on packaging, the letter added to the end

of the product name indicates the color of the RDC-7.1.

Speciﬁcations and operation are the same regardless of

color.

*Only available as option for the USA and Canadian models

Features

—Continued

• THX is a trademark or registered trademark of THX Ltd. All

rights reserved.

• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Deﬁnition Multimedia

Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing, LLC.

* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” “Surround EX,” and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

• “DTS,” “DTS 96/24,” “DTS-ES,” and “NEO:6” are trademarks

of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

• The i.LINK logo is a trademark of Sony Corporation, registered

in the U.S. and other countries.

• Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX Ltd.

• “Net-Tune” is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.

• Windows Media and the Windows logo are trandemarks, or

registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other

countries.

• Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.

• MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and THOMSON multimedia.

• “XiVA” is a registered trademark of Imerge Limited.

• Xantech is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.

• Niles is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.

• Clocked by Apogee is under licence and trademark of Apogee

Electronics, Inc.

“This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is

protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use

of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by

Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other

limited consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by

Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.”

For European Models

THX Ultra2

Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2 certiﬁed, it

must pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only

then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your

guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give

you superb performance for many years to come. THX Ultra2

requirements deﬁne hundreds of parameters, including power

ampliﬁer performance, and pre-ampliﬁer performance and

operation for both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2

receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX

Mode) which accurately translate ﬁlm soundtracks for home theater

playback.

RDC-7.1 provides option boards for advanced

capability.

For details on option boards, see page 146.

Declaration of Conformity

We, ONKYO EUROPE

ELECTRONICS GmbH

LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,

82194 GROEBENZELL,

GERMANY

GROEBENZELL, GERMANY

ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH

I. MORI

declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product

described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the

corresponding technical standards such as EN60065,

EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.

Getting Started

Supplied Accessories

Make sure you have the following accessories:

Plug the supplied power cord into this AC INLET.

•Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied

with the RDC-7.1. The power cord supplied is

designed for use with the RDC-7.1 and should not be

used with any other device.

•Never have the power cord disconnected from the

RDC-7.1 while the other end is plugged into the wall

outlet. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Always

connect by plugging into the wall outlet last and dis-

connect by unplugging from the wall outlet ﬁrst.

Remote Controller & Three Batteries (AA/R6)

AM Loop Antenna (not supplied with USA and Cana-

dian models)

Indoor FM antenna (not supplied with USA and

Canadian models)

(connector type varies from country to country)

Speaker Labels

Power Cord

Front

Left

Front

Left

SP-B

Zone 2

Left

SP-B

Zone 2

Left

Surround

Right

Surround

Right

Surround Back

Right

Surround Back

Right

Zone 2

Right

Zone 2

Right

Front

Left

Front

Left

SP-B

Zone 2

Left

SP-B

Zone 2

Left

Front

Right

Front

Right

SP-B

Zone 2

Right

SP-B

Zone 2

Right

Front

Right

Front

Right

SP-B

Zone 2

Right

SP-B

Zone 2

Right

Surround

Right

Surround

Right

Center

Surround

Left

Surround

Left

Surround

Left

Surround

Left

Surround Back

Right

Surround Back

Right

Zone 2

Right

Zone 2

Right

Surround Back

Left

Surround Back

Left

Zone 2

Left

Zone 2

Left

Surround Back

Left

Surround Back

Left

Zone 2

Left

Zone 2

Left

Speaker Cable

Precautions during unpacking

•The unit is extremely heavy, so be careful when

lifting it so as not to cause an injury. Do not lift

or move the unit by holding it at the door on the

front panel. Doing so may damage the front

door.

•When packaged, the door on the front panel is

taped to the unit. Before use, be sure to remove

this tape.

•The taping for packaging may be different for

your product.

Connecting the Supplied Power Cord

Off

Standby/On

Standby

Master Volume

Power

DVD Vido 1 Video

Video

Tape

Tuner Phono CD Net Audio Open/Close

Video 7

Pure Audio

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

Zone

()

GRN

Rec/

Zone

()

RED

Taped

INLET

DO NOT connect the

power cord at this time.

Power Cord

(supplied)

(plug type varies from

country to country)

Before Using the RDC-7.1

Notes:

•The supplied batteries should last for about six

months, although this will vary with usage.

•If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try

replacing the batteries.

•Don’t mix new and old batteries, or different types of

batteries.

•If you intend not to use the remote controller for a

long time, remove the batteries to prevent possible

leakage and corrosion.

•Expired batteries should be removed as soon as

possible to prevent damage from leakage or

corrosion.

To use the remote controller, point it at the RDC-7.1’s

remote control sensor, as shown below. The RDC-7.1’s

[Standby] indicator ﬂashes while a signal is being

received from the remote controller.

Notes:

•The remote controller may not work reliably if the

RDC-7.1 is subjected to bright light, such as direct

sunlight or inverter-type ﬂuorescent lights. Keep this

in mind when installing the RDC-7.1.

•If another remote controller of the same type is used

in the same room, or the RDC-7.1 is installed close to

equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote

controller may not work reliably.

•Don’t put anything, such as a book, on the remote

controller, because the buttons may be pressed

inadvertently, thereby draining the batteries.

•The remote controller may not work reliably if the

RDC-7.1 is installed in a rack behind colored glass

doors. Keep this in mind when installing the

RDC-7.1.

•The remote controller will not work if there’s an

obstacle between it and the RDC-7.1’s remote control

sensor.

•(RC-555M only) You can set the transmission signal

format to infrared (IR), or radio frequency (RF) for

use with the optional RF Receiver. This is useful

when, for example, the RDC-7.1 is installed in a rack

or is not in line of sight of the remote controller.

•To select AMP mode, press the scroll wheel. “AMP”

appears on the display.

Installing the Batteries

To open the battery compartment, press

the small hollow and slide off the cover.

Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)

in accordance with the polarity diagram

inside the battery compartment.

Put the cover onto the remote controller

and slide it shut.

Using the Remote Controller

30˚ 30˚

Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)

Remote control sensor

Standby indicator

RDC-7.1

Getting Started

Index Parts and Facilities

Here is an explanation of the controls and displays on the front panel of the RDC-7.1.

The speciﬁcations for your model may differ due to regional requirements.

Front Panel

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2 ()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3 ()

RED

O f f

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Index Parts and Facilities

—Continued

For further operational instructions, see the pages

indicated in brackets [ ].

Power switch [52]

Press to turn on and off the main power supply for

the RDC-7.1. When the RDC-7.1 is turned on with

the [Power] switch, the [Standby] indicator lights.

•Before turning on the power, check to make sure

that all cords are properly connected.

•When the power is turned on, a sudden surge of

current will occur that may adversely affect the

operation of other devices. To prevent this, do not

plug the RDC-7.1 into the same circuit used by

sensitive equipment, e.g., computers.

Standby/On button and On indicator [52]

If pressed with the [Power] switch turned on, the

RDC-7.1 turns on and the display and [On] indicator

light up. If pressed again, the RDC-7.1 returns to the

standby state. In the standby state, the display and

[On] indicator are turned off and the RDC-7.1 cannot

be operated.

Standby indicator [9, 52]

Lights when the RDC-7.1 is in the standby state and

when a signal is received from the remote controller.

Remote control sensor [9]

Front display

Master Volume dial [52]

Use to control the volume in the main zone. The

volume for the remote zone (Zone 2 and Zone 3) is

independent.

Open/Close button

Press this button to open and close the front door

that covers the lower buttons.

Input source buttons and indicators (DVD,

Video 1–7, Tape 1-2, Tuner, Phono, CD, and

Net Audio) [52, 62, 65, 80]

Press these buttons to select the input source for the

main zone. When an input source is selected, the

indicator will light in blue.

To select the input source for the remote zone (Zone

2), ﬁrst press the [Zone 2] button, and then the

desired input source button.

To select the input source for the remote zone (Zone

3) or recording out (Rec Out), ﬁrst press the [Rec/

Zone 3] button, and then the desired input source

button.

Zone 2 (GRN) and Rec/Zone 3 (RED)

Indicator [70, 72]

For Zone 2, the indicator above the selected input

source button will light green. For recording or

Zone 3, it will light red. When the same input

source is selected for Zone 2 and Rec/Zone 3, it will

light orange.

Pure Audio indicator [61]

Lights during pure audio playback.

Getting Started

Index Parts and Facilities

—Continued

Caution:

The front door of the AV Controller is motorized. Use the [Open/Close] button to open or close the door. Manually

opening or closing the door, or moving the AV Controller while holding the door, will cause the door to malfunc-

tion or break.

Zone 2 button [70]

Press this button to enter the Zone 2 conﬁguration

mode. If you want to conﬁgure the Zone 2 settings

such as standby/on setting, input source setting,

listening mode, volume adjustment, audio selector

mode, and display settings, press this button ﬁrst.

Rec/Zone 3 button [70, 72]

Press the [Rec/Zone 3] button to output to a

recording component for recording purposes or

enter the Zone 3 mode. After pressing the [Rec/

Zone 3] button, press one of the input source

selector buttons within 3 seconds to select the

component. When one is selected, the indicator

above that button will light in red. To record from

the same input source that you are using (that is

selected for the main zone), press the [Rec/Zone 3]

button twice in succession.

Note:

Recording and Zone 3 operations use the same

circuit and therefore cannot be used at the same

time.

Inner Panel

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

RT/PTY/TP

AV Controller RDC-7.1

USA, Canadian, and Australian models

European models

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Dimmer Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Index Parts and Facilities

—Continued

Off [71]

When not using either Rec/Zone 3 or Zone 2, press

that button and then press the [Off] button to turn

off the signal.

If the Rec/Zone 3 or Zone 2 signal is turned on and

the connected component is not turned on, the

electric signal will still be sent through the circuitry

and the excess load may cause deterioration of the

audio signal.

Display button [56]

Press to display information about the current input

source signal. Each time you press the [Display]

button, the screen changes to show you different

information concerning the input signal.

DSP [61]

Press these buttons to scroll through the listening

modes and set a new one for the input source you

are currently listening to. For each different input

signal, different listening modes are possible. See

page 58 for a detailed explanation of the different

listening modes.

Dimmer button (Other than European

models) [54]

Press to set the brightness of the front display. There are

four settings available: normal, dark, very dark, and

volume only.

For European models, this function can be operated

only with the remote controller.

RT/PTY/TP button (European models only) [65]

This button is only available on European models.

Press this button to tune into the Radio Data System

(RDS) for FM broadcasting. RDS was developed

within the European Broadcasting Union (EBU)

and is available in most European countries. Each

time the button is pressed, the display changes from

RT (radio text) to PTY (program type) to TP (trafﬁc

program) and then back to RT again.

Tuning button [62]

Use these buttons to change the tuner frequency.

The tuner frequency is displayed in the front display

and it can be changed in 50 kHz increments for FM

and 9 kHz increments for AM. When a station is

tuned into, “> <” will appear in the front display

(When the stereo signal is received,

“

” will appear).

Preset button [63]

When AM or FM is selected as the input source,

press one of these buttons to jump to a radio station

that you preset using the [Memory] button. Pressing

the right button moves from the most recently preset

station to older ones, and pressing the left button

moves in the reverse order.

Tuning Mode button [62, 63]

This button is used to select the Auto or Manual

Tuning Mode.

Memory button [63]

Press to assign the radio station, to which you are

currently tuned, as a preset channel or press to

delete a previously preset station.

Setup /[ ]/[ ]/Enter/[ ]/[ ]/Exit [90]

These buttons are used with the On Screen Display

(OSD) menu.

Setup:

Press to bring up the OSD menu.

Exit:

Press to exit the OSD menu when at the Menu

Screen, or move to one screen previous to the one

that is displayed if at any other screen.

and

: When selecting items in the OSD menu,

press these buttons to move the on-screen cursor (or

the highlighted portion) upward and downward.

and

When setting parameters in the OSD

menu, press these buttons to select parameter values

or modes.

Enter:

Press to display the screen for the selected

item in the OSD menu.

Note for European models:

These buttons are also used to set programs and

ﬁnish scans when performing a PTY or TP scan

with the RDS broadcasts.

Phones jack [54]

This is a standard stereo jack for connecting stereo

headphones.

Getting Started

Index Parts and Facilities

—Continued

The design of rear panel varies depending upon region for which the model is intended. For models intended for USA,

Canada, and Australia, refer to “Using the RDC-7.1 with Option Boards” on page 146.

( ) i.LINK S400 (AUDIO) terminals

These connectors are for connecting to an i.LINK

(AUDIO)-ready device using a 4-pin (S400) i.LINK

(AUDIO) cable. The RDC-7.1 complies with the

standards on audio only transmissions.

ETHERNET (Net-Tune)

(Only available as option for the USA model.)

This connector is for connecting to an Ethernet network.

DIGITAL OPTICAL IN/OUT

The input/output terminals for digital sound signal.

The sound quality equals the signal passed through

the COAXIAL terminals.

DIGITAL COAXIAL IN/OUT

The input/output terminals for digital sound signal.

The sound quality equals the signal passed through

the OPTICAL terminals.

MULTI-CH IN 1

(Only available as option for the USA model.)

This connector is for connecting components with a

multichannel output.

DIGITAL IN (BALANCED) AES/EBU

(Only available as option for the USA model.)

The DIGITAL IN (BALANCED) AES/EBU

terminal is for connecting the DVD player and other

devices equipped with the XLR (balanced) type

digital audio output terminal.

AUDIO IN/OUT

These connectors are for connecting to the audio

input and output jacks on audio/video components.

To connect a turntable, connect to the PH jacks.

In addition to the PH jacks, the RDC-7.1 offers nine

input and ﬁve output jacks.

VIDEO/S VIDEO IN/OUT

(Only available as option for the USA model.)

These connectors are for connecting to the video

input and output jacks on video components.

Six input and four output jacks are available for

each of VIDEO and S VIDEO connection.

COMPONENT VIDEO IN/OUT

(Only available as option for the USA model.)

These connectors are for connecting to the component

video outputs/inputs of video components that have them.

European and Asian models are equipped with three

inputs and one output for the RCA-type

COMPONENT connection and one input and

output for the BNC-type COMPONENT

connection.

Rear Panel

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

EMULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

(

HD/ BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/ BNC

)

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

A B

232

OUT

*This terminal is provided for future service enhancement and is not used currently. Never plug the cable connector for other

terminals into this terminal.

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

UDD

232

V DC PWR SUPPLY

MAIN

GND

ZONE

GND

TRIGGER

OUT

100mA MAX.

TOTAL

100mA MAX.

200mA MAX.

20mA MAX.

12 V

TRIGGER

OUT

USA and

Canadian

models

Index Parts and Facilities

—Continued

ANTENNA (FM/AM)

(Only available as option for the USA model.)

These jacks are for connecting the FM indoor

antenna and the AM loop antenna that are supplied

with the RDC-7.1.

HDMI IN/OUT

(Only available as option for the USA model.)

This interface can transfer digital audio and video

signals simultaneously. The terminal can be

connected to the HDMI terminal on components

such as DVD player, set top box (B tuner),

projector, and digital TV.

REMOTE CONTROL

This jack is for connecting other IntegraRESEARCH/

Onkyo components equipped with the same

terminal. The audio connection cables must also be

connected.

RS 232

This port is for connecting the RDC-7.1 to home

automation and external controllers.

12V TRIGGER OUT

These connectors are used to connect to the 12V

TRIGGER IN terminal of a component. Available

connectors are one with maximum current capacity

of 200 mA and four with 100 mA.

IR IN (for all models), IR OUT (other than

USA and Canadian models)

These connectors are for connecting the remote

sensor of a multiroom kit (sold separately).

The connectors are provided for main room, Zone 2,

and Zone 3.

PRE OUT A/B (RCA type)

These jacks are for connecting power ampliﬁers. If

the jacks on your power ampliﬁer are RCA type

jacks, connect them here. Both of the PRE OUT A

and PRE OUT B sections offer all the terminals for

the front left and right, center, surround, surround

back and subwoofer channels.

PRE OUT A (Balanced type)

These jacks are for connecting power ampliﬁers. If

the jacks on your power ampliﬁer are XLR

(balanced) type jacks, connect them here.

AC INLET

This connector is for connecting the supplied power

cord.

Listening mode or input format indicators

One of these indicators lights to show the format of

the current input source. In addition, one of the

listening mode indicators lights to indicate the

current listening mode.

Multifunction display

During normal operation, shows the current input

source. When the FM or AM input is selected,

shows the frequency and preset number. When the

[Display] button is pressed, shows the listening

mode and input source format.

Audio input signal path indicators

Shows from which terminal the audio input signal is

coming.

MAIN A/B indicators

Indicates which room is currently in use.

SLEEP indicator

Lights when the sleep timer is turned on.

Tuning indicators

AUTO indicator

Lights when receiving FM broadcasts in the stereo

mode. Turns off when placed into the monaural mode.

RDS indicator (European models only)

Lights when an RDS station is being received.

TUNED

indicator

Lights when a radio station is being received.

MEMORY indicator

Lights when the [Memory] button is pressed to

preset a radio station.

FM STEREO indicator

Lights when an FM broadcast station is being

received in stereo. Turns off when placed into the

monaural mode.

Program format display

When the input source is DVD video, Super Audio

CD, or compressed digital audio signal such as

Dolby Digital and DTS, the channels corresponding

to the input source light.

Volume display

Shows the volume level.

Video input signal path indicators

Shows from which terminal the video input signal is

coming.

Front Panel Display

Getting Started

Index Parts and Facilities

—Continued

The RDC-7.1’s remote controller is a multipurpose

device that can be used to control not just the RDC-7.1

but your other AV components as well. This section

explains how its various operating modes can be used to

control the RDC-7.1. When you use the Net-Tune

mode, see page 78 for details. See page 124 for

information on using the remote controller to control

IntegraRESEARCH components connected via and

TVs, VCRs, and AV components made by other

manufacturers.

Amp mode is used to control the RDC-7.1.

To select

Amp mode, press the scroll wheel. “AMP” appears

on the display.

Note:

While neither the [Input] button nor the [Mode] button

is illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input

source and remote controller mode simultaneously.

On button

This button is used to turn on the RDC-7.1.

Standby button

This button is used to set the RDC-7.1 to Standby.

Number/letter buttons

These buttons are used to enter numbers and letters.

Custom button

This button is used to access various settings that

you can use to customize the operation of the

remote controller.

Macro button

This button is used with the Macro function.

Mode button

This button is used with the scroll wheel to select

the remote controller modes.

Dimmer button

This button is used to adjust the display brightness.

Up/Down/Left/Right [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] &

Enter buttons

These buttons are used to select items on the

onscreen setup menus (OSD). The [ENTER] button

is also used to enter names and to conﬁrm settings.

CH +/– button

This button is used to select radio presets.

Return button

This button is used to return to the previously

displayed onscreen setup menu (OSD).

Display button

This button is used to display various information

about the currently selected input source.

Main A button

For the speakers used in main room A, every press

of this button toggles the status between enabled

and disabled.

THX button

This button is used to select the THX listening

modes.

Surround button

This button is used to select the Dolby and DTS

listening modes.

Direct button

This button is used to select the Direct listening

mode.

Remote Controller (Amp Mode)

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

Index Parts and Facilities

—Continued

Pure A button

This button is used to select the Pure Audio listen-

ing mode.

Test Tone, CH SEL, Level– & Level + buttons

These buttons are used to adjust the level of each

speaker individually. These functions can be set

only with the remote controller. The [Level –] and

[Level +] buttons are also used to adjust the volume

in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Audio SEL button

This button is used to select the audio input signal

format (e.g., analog, digital, etc.).

LIGHT button

This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-

troller’s illuminated buttons.

Direct Tuning button

This button is used with the number buttons to

select a radio station by entering its frequency. Press

this button ﬁrst, and then use the number buttons to

enter the frequency.

Display

The top line of this LCD display shows the name of

the currently selected input source. The bottom line

shows the currently selected remote controller

mode.

Zone 3 button

This button is used when you want to set the volume

and input source for Zone 3.

Zone 2 button

This button is used when you want to set the volume

and input source for Zone 2.

Input button

This button is used to select the input source. Press

this button ﬁrst, and then roll the scroll wheel until

the name of the input source appears on the display.

Sleep button

This button is used to set the Sleep function. This

function can be set only with the remote controller.

VOL button

This button is used to set the volume of the

RDC-7.1.

Setup button

This button is used to access the onscreen setup

menus (OSD) that appear on the TV.

Muting button

This button is used to mute the RDC-7.1. This

function can be set only with the remote controller.

Main B button

For the speakers used in main room B, every press

of this button toggles the status between enabled

and disabled.

All CH ST button

This button is used to select the All Ch Stereo

listening mode.

Stereo button

This button is used to select the Stereo listening

mode.

DSP/DSP buttons

These buttons are used to select the listening modes.

Re-EQ button

This button is used to turn on and off the Re-EQ

function.

L Night button

This button is used to set the Late Night function.

Open/Close [ ] button

This button is used to open and close the front door

that covers the lower buttons.

Getting Started

Speaker Placement

The RDC-7.1 has many excellent features to recreate a clear three-dimensional sound image and lively sound movement.

This enables you to enjoy, at home, the rich sound effects of a live theater or concert hall performance.

When playing a DVD, you can enjoy sound effects provided by DTS or Dolby Digital, depending on the recording

format. In addition, you can enjoy THX sound and IntegraRESEARCH’s proprietary DSP surround playback for TV or

digital satellite broadcasts.

• For optimum surround playback, set the distance between the listener and the speakers so that the time it takes

the sound to reach the listener is same. Also, you need to set each speaker volume level individually in order to

balance the volume level between speakers (See pages 92 to 94).

Basic Speaker Placements for Home Theater and the Function of Respective

Speakers

Center speaker

Complements the sound effects from front left and right speakers

to enrich and clear the sound image and movement. In movies, an

actor’s speech comes mainly from the center speaker.

Subwoofer

Outputs only bass sounds to

enhance and complement bass

sound effects.

Front left and right speakers

Outputs overall sound. They play the most important role in a home the-

ater system, by creating basic sound images and ﬁelds.

Surround left and right speakers

Enhances the sensation of being at a live performance by giving three-dimensional

sound movement to the sound effects.

Surround back speakers

Enhances the sound space

representation with sur-

round channel signals.

Recreating sound move-

ment effects and sound

ﬁelds behind the listener

gives a more realistic

experience.

Speaker Placement

—Continued

To fully enjoy surround sound, the conﬁguration and placement of the speakers used are important. Be sure to read

through the descriptions in the previous page and shown below.

This section provides examples and descriptions that assume a typical situation.

Front Left and Right Speakers, and Center Speaker

•Place the front left and right speakers symmetrically and so

that the distance from the listening position is the same.

•When placing speakers, direct the speakers toward the

position of the listener’s ears where the listener sits to enjoy

music or movies.

•Place the three speakers so that the heights of the three

speakers are aligned. The ideal height for the speakers is the

height of the listener’s ears. When placing the center

speaker above or below the TV, tilt it toward the listener’s

ears.

•Place the center speaker as close to the screen or monitor as

possible and in the center between the left and right front

speakers. When placing the center speaker near the TV, use a shielded speaker.

•If no center speaker is used, place the left and right front speakers closer to each other.

Left and Right Surround Speakers

•Place these speakers on each side of, or angled behind, the

listener.

•Place the surround speakers symmetrically from the listener

position and so that the distance from the listener is equal

between left and right surround speakers.

•When enjoying mainly movies, placing the surround

speakers about 3 feet (1 m) higher than the height of the

listener’s ears, results in more of a surround effect.

•When enjoying mainly music, placing the surround

speakers at the height of the front speakers may provide a

better surround effect.

•When using surround back speakers in addition to the

surround speakers, placing the surround speakers slightly forward from their current position will make the sound

movement smoother.

Surround Back Speakers

•Place the speakers about 3 feet (1 m) or higher than the

height of the listener’s ears.

•When using one surround back speaker, place it behind the

listener.

•When using two surround back speakers, place them

behind the listener so that the angles between the lines from

each surround back speaker to the listener and a line

straight back from the listener are about 30 degrees,

forming an equilateral triangle of the listener and the two

surround back speakers.

*When using a THX-certiﬁed speaker system, also refer to

“Speaker Placement Suitable for THX Audio” on the next

page.

Placing the Speakers

Front

Left

Front

Right

Front

Left

Front

Right

Center

TV or screen

Surround Back

Installation and Connections

Speaker Placement

—Continued

Subwoofer

Using a subwoofer greatly improves the volume level and

sound quality of bass sounds. The subwoofer effect depends

not only on the listening position but also on the shape of the

listening room.

•In general, place the subwoofer in a corner of the room or at

a point 1/3 the width of the room.

•Play a movie or music that contains high quality bass

sounds to determine the subwoofer placement. Change the

subwoofer’s position and check the effect, then select the

position where the bass sounds are best heard.

•You can place two subwoofers for more powerful and

richer heavy bass sounds.

To enjoy sources using THX Cinema or THX Surround EX

technology, we recommend using a THX speaker system from

THX Ltd. A speaker system supporting the THX Ultra2

standard is best suited for THX Ultra2 Cinema or THX Music

Mode.

The layout example on the right represents a case using the

dipole speakers. A dipole speaker is a two-way directivity

speaker that outputs the same sound in two directions such as

forward and backward.

Most dipole speakers are marked with an arrow indicating how

they should be oriented in the room in order to match their

phases*. Dipole surround speakers should be placed so that

their arrows point forward toward the screen, and dipole

surround back speakers should be placed so that their arrows

point toward each other.

*Phase: The word represents the waveform position in one cycle (0 to 360 degrees) of a sine wave. If

the phase does not match between multiple waveforms due to the distance between multiple speakers,

the speaker orientation, or the miswiring of positive and negative poles, the sound image or space may

be obscured or the sound may be less easy to listen to.

When playing the source in the THX Ultra2 Cinema or THX Music Mode format using two

surround back speakers supporting the THX Ultra2 standard, place them as close together as

possible. After placing the surround back speakers, perform the settings described in the

“THX Audio Setup” (page 94).

This placement is based on the ITU-R* recommendation. In this placement, ﬁve

speakers with the same performance capabilities are used for front left and right,

center, and left and right surround speakers, and they are placed so that the distances

between every speaker and the listening position are equal to each other and the

heights of the speaker and the listener’s ears are the same. A mixing studio used for

making multichannel DVD-Audio source material adopts this placement.

*ITU-R: International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication Sector

1/3 room

length

Corner

Speaker Placement Suitable for THX Audio

Layout with dipole speakers

8 9

1 TV or screen

2 Subwoofer

3 Front left speaker

4 Center speaker

5 Front right speaker

6 Surround left speaker

7 Surround right

speaker

8 Surround back left

speaker

9 Surround back right

speaker

10 Listening position

As close as

possible

Speaker Placement Suitable for a Music Source such as DVD-Audio

Center

Sub-

woofer

Front

Right

Front

Left

Speaker Placement

—Continued

The following speaker placements will be available

according to the number of speakers connected to the

RDC-7.1. For the number of speaker channel, _.1 ch

represents a subwoofer.

Key to abbreviations:

: Front left speaker,

: Front right speaker,

: Center

speaker,

: Surround left speaker,

: Surround right

speaker,

SBL

: Surround back left speaker,

SBR

: Surround

back right speaker,

: Subwoofer

2 ch/2.1 ch

This placement is used with

two speakers (front left and

right speakers). It is

optimum for 2 ch sources

including analog 2 ch, 2 ch

linear PCM, Dolby Digital,

DTS, DTS96/24, and AAC

format sources. When the

number of channels in the

source is 3.1 or greater, the

signals will be distributed

through the left and right channels accordingly.

3 ch/3.1 ch

This placement is used with

three speakers (front left,

front right, and center

speakers). When the number

of channels in the source is

4.1 or greater, the signal for

surround and surround back

channels will be output

through the front left and

right speakers.

4 ch/4.1 ch

In this placement, when the

number of channels in the

source is 5.1 or greater, the

center channel signal will be

output through the front left

and right speakers, and the

surround back channels will

be output through the

surround speakers.

5 ch/5.1 ch

This placement is suitable for

playing 5.1 ch sources

including analog multichannel,

Dolby Digital, DTS, and AAC

format sources. When the

source is 2 ch or mono, the

signal will be decoded with

Dolby Pro Logic II or DTS

NEO:6 format and played as

5.1 ch sources.

When the number of

channels in the source is 6.1 or greater, the surround

back signal will be distributed through the surround left

and right speakers accordingly.

6 ch/6.1 ch/7 ch/7.1 ch (with center speaker)

This placement is suitable for

playing 6.1 ch sources

including DTS-ES Matrix/

Discrete and Dolby Surround

EX format signals.

When you use two surround

back speakers, the same signal

will be output from them

because the surround back

channel is mono. When the

source is 2 ch or mono, it will

be decoded with the Dolby

Pro Logic IIx/DTS NEO:6

format and played as 6.1/7.1

ch sources.

6 ch/6.1 ch/5 ch/5.1 ch (without center speaker)

This placement is suitable for

playing 5.1 or 6.1 ch sources

when the surround back

sound is much more

preferred than the center

sound with less speaker units

than the normal

conﬁguration. The center

channel signal will be output

through the front left and

right speakers.

Available Speaker Placements

According to the Number of Speakers

FL FR

FL C

SBL SBR

Installation and Connections

Speaker Placement

—Continued

The RDC-7.1 has two speaker terminal blocks for speaker system [A] and [B]. This allows you to build two 7.1 ch

home theater systems, and various speaker placements and connections are also available. For example, some channels

of either speaker system can be used for another room (Zone 2), or you can select one of two speaker systems for

playback according to the source.

When you use two speaker systems, you have to associate the speakers with the zone (e.g., Main A, Main B, etc.).

After making the association, for example, pressing the “Main A” button on the remote controller will output the

source from the speakers conﬁgured as “Main A.”

Here are some examples of speaker placement and zone association. These examples can be your reference when you

build your own home theater system. The illustration on the right represents the actual settings displayed corresponding to

each example. For details on conﬁguring speaker placement and zone association, see page 92.

*In the following illustrations, white speakers denote speaker system [A] and gray ones denote speaker system [B].

*Key to abbreviations:

: Front left speaker;

: Front right speaker;

: Center speaker;

: Surround left speaker;

: Surround right speaker;

SBL

: Surround back left speaker;

SBR

: Surround back right speaker;

: Subwoofer

Main room A: 7.1 ch speaker system; Main room B: 7.1ch speaker system

Main room A: 7.1 ch speaker systems and the two additional front speakers

(When you want to use speaker system [A] for movies and enjoy 7.1 surround sound and the two additional front

speakers for classic music.)

•Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [A] to “Main A.”

•Set the front speaker parameters for speaker system [B] to “Main A.”

•If you want to use the front speakers of speaker system [B] for speciﬁc sources, select the source and set the front

speaker setting parameters to “B” in the listening mode setup menu.

When you want to output to both speaker systems simultaneously, you can choose the “A+B” setting.

•To output the sound, press the [Main A] button on the remote controller.

Connection Examples

When you wish to conﬁgure 7.1 ch speaker system in the main room A only, the initial setting can be used without

any modiﬁcation.

FL C

SBL SBR

FL C

SBL SBR

1-1.Speaker Config

=====================

Speaker A

a.Front L/R :Main A

b.Center :Main A

c.Surr L/R :Main A

d.Surr Back

:Main A 2ch

e.Subwoofer :Main A

Speaker B

f.Front L/R :Main B

g.Center :Main B

h.Surr L/R :Main B

i.Surr Back

:Main B 2ch

j.Subwoofer :Main B

•Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [A] to “Main A.”

•Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [B] to “Main B.”

•Pressing the [Main A] or [Main B] button causes the sound to be output from the speaker system associated

with the zone button. Both speaker systems cannot be selected simultaneously.

*If you set all the zone parameters for speaker system [B] to “Main A” and play a single source, the same audio signal will be

output from both speaker systems [A] and [B].

Main room A Main room B

FL FL C

SBL SBR

FRFR

Here is an example of the

stereo listening mode.

1-1.Speaker Config

=====================

Speaker A

a.Front L/R :Main A

b.Center :Main A

c.Surr L/R :Main A

d.Surr Back

:Main A 2ch

e.Subwoofer :Main A

Speaker B

f.Front L/R :Main A

g.Center :Not Used

h.Surr L/R :Not Used

i.Surr Back

:Not Used

j.Subwoofer :Not Used

3-3.Stereo

=====================

a.Re-EQ/Academy

:Off

b.Front Speaker :B

c.Subwoofer :A

Main room A

Speaker Placement

—Continued

Main room A: 7.1 ch speaker system and the two additional front speakers connected through the bi-

amp connection (when you want to use either the 7.1 ch speakers or the additional front speakers

according to the source)

•Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [A] to “Main A.”

•For speaker system [B], set the front speaker parameters to “Main A” and the surround back speaker parameters to

“Bi-Amp for Front” (For details on connections, see page 27).

•When you want to use the front speakers of speaker system [B] for speciﬁc sources, select the source and set the

front speaker parameters to “B” in the listening mode setup menu.

*When using the bi-amp connections, the two speaker systems cannot be used to output simultaneously.

Main room A: 5.1 ch speaker system including the front speakers connected through the bi-amp

connections

•For speaker system [A], set the surround back speaker parameters to “Bi-Amp for Front” and all the other speaker

parameters to “Main A” (For details on speaker connections, see page 27).

•For speaker system [B], set the speaker parameters to “Not Used.”

*When using the bi-amp connections, you cannot use Zone 2 since the surround back channel is used for the front speakers of main

room A.

FL FL C

SBL SBR

Here is an example of the

stereo listening mode.

1-1.Speaker Config

=====================

Speaker A

a.Front L/R :Main A

b.Center :Main A

c.Surr L/R :Main A

d.Surr Back

:Main A 2ch

e.Subwoofer :Main A

Speaker B

f.Front L/R :Main A

g.Center :Not Used

h.Surr L/R :Not Used

i.Surr Back

:Bi-Amp for Front

j.Subwoofer :Not Used

3-3.Stereo

=====================

a.Re-EQ/Academy

:Off

b.Front Speaker :B

c.Subwoofer :A

Main room A

FL C

Main room A

1-1.Speaker Config

=====================

Speaker A

a.Front L/R :Main A

b.Center :Main A

c.Surr L/R :Main A

d.Surr Back

:Bi-Amp for Front

e.Subwoofer :Main A

Speaker B

f.Front L/R :Not Used

g.Center :Not Used

h.Surr L/R :Not Used

i.Surr Back

:Not Used

j.Subwoofer :Not Used

Installation and Connections

Speaker Placement

—Continued

Main room A: 7.1 ch from speaker system [A] and additional subwoofer and surround speakers from

speaker system [B] (suitable for enjoying more powerful and lively surround sound in main room A);

Main room B: two front speakers from speaker system [B] using the bi-amp connections

•For speaker system [A], set all the speaker parameters to “Main A.”

•For speaker system [B], set the surround speaker and subwoofer parameters to “Main A,” the front speaker

parameters to “Main B,” and the surround back speaker parameters to “Bi-Amp for Front” (For details on speaker

connections, see page 27).

•When you want to use the surround speakers and subwoofer of speaker system [B] for speciﬁc sources, select the

source and set the parameters for these speakers to “B” or “A+B” in the listening mode setup menu.

When you set the parameter to “B,” the audio signal comes out from the surround speakers and subwoofer of

speaker system [B]. When you set the parameter to “A+B,” the signal comes out from the surround speakers and

subwoofer of both speaker systems [A] and [B].

FL C

SBL SBR

FL FR

Here is an example of the

multichannel listening mode.

1-1.Speaker Config

=====================

Speaker A

a.Front L/R :Main A

b.Center :Main A

c.Surr L/R :Main A

d.Surr Back

:Main A 2ch

e.Subwoofer :Main A

Speaker B

f.Front L/R :Main B

g.Center :Not Used

h.Surr L/R :Main A

i.Surr Back

:Bi-Amp for Front

j.Subwoofer :Main A

3-5.Multichannel Input

=====================

b.Re-EQ :Off

e.Surr L/R Sp :A+B

g.Subwoofer :A+B

Main room A

Main room B

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer

You can connect the power ampliﬁer that has RCA type input terminals to the RDC-7.1 using RCA type cables. Two

RCA type input terminal sets (A and B) are available for this connection.

The PRE OUT A terminals reﬂect the mode settings conﬁgured for the “Speaker System [A].”

The PRE OUT B terminals reﬂect the mode settings conﬁgured for the “Speaker System [B].”

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer Using RCA Type Cables

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R F

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

OUT

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU 3

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH

SPEAKER TERMINAL

AC INLET SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

INPUT

SELECT

FUSE

SURROUND BACK

RIGHT

SURROUND

RIGHT

12V TRIGGER

IN OUT

SURROUND

LEFT

CENTER FRONT

LEFT

SURROUND BACK

LEFT

FRONT

RIGHT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

LINE INPUT

RDC-7.1

Power ampliﬁer

Subwoofer

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH

SPEAKER TERMINAL

AC INLET SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

INPUT

SELECT

FUSE

SURROUND BACK

RIGHT

SURROUND

RIGHT

12V TRIGGER

IN OUT

SURROUND

LEFT

CENTER FRONT

LEFT

SURROUND BACK

LEFT

FRONT

RIGHT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

LINE INPUT

RONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

OUT

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

UPP

ZONE

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

OUT

RDC-7.1

Power ampliﬁer

Subwoofer

Installation and Connections

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer

—Continued

You can connect the power ampliﬁer that has XLR

(balanced) type input terminals to the RDC-7.1 using

XLR type cables. One XLR type input terminal set is

available for this connection.

The pin assignments for these terminals, which conform

to the AES* standard, are shown below.

*AES: Audio Engineering Society

Check the instruction manual that came with your power

ampliﬁer and verify that the input pin assignments are

compatible with those for the RDC-7.1.

1. Connecting the output terminal

Match the pins and insert the terminal until you hear a

“click.” Ensure that it is secure by gently pulling it.

2. Disconnecting the output terminal

Pull out the cable (in the direction indicated by the

arrow) while holding down the connection cable

button.

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer Using

XLR Type Cables

1. GND

2. non-inverting (+)

3. inverting (–)

XLR type Balanced cable

Push

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

AUDIO

The

i.LINK

logo

trademarks

Sony

Corporation, registered

the

U.S.

and

other

countries.

S400

OUT

LR RL

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

FRON

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH

SPEAKER TERMINAL

AC INLET SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

INPUT

SELECT

FUSE

SURROUND BACK

RIGHT

SURROUND

RIGHT

12V TRIGGER

IN OUT

SURROUND

LEFT

CENTER FRONT

LEFT

SURROUND BACK

LEFT

FRONT

RIGHT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

LINE INPUT

RDC-7.1

Power ampliﬁer

Subwoofer

Connecting a Power Ampliﬁer

—Continued

When you use bi-wiring-enabled speakers for the front speakers, you can make the bi-amp connection. In this

connection, the front and surround back speaker terminals on the power ampliﬁer will be used for tweeter and woofer,

respectively. This connection allows you to obtain high quality sound as well as maximum treble and bass performance

from the tweeter and woofer, enriching your sound experience.

Caution:

When making the bi-amp connection, make sure to remove the shorting bars connecting the high range

(Tweeter) and low range (Woofer) terminals.

For the settings on the bi-amp connection, see pages 92 and 93.

1. Connect the (+) tweeter terminal of the right speaker to the FRONT RIGHT (+) terminal on the power ampliﬁer

and the (+) woofer terminal of the right speaker to the SURROUND BACK RIGHT (+) terminal on the power

ampliﬁer.

2. Connect the (–) tweeter terminal of the right speaker to the FRONT RIGHT (–) terminal on the power ampliﬁer

and the (–) woofer terminal of the right speaker to the SURROUND BACK RIGHT (–) terminal on the power

ampliﬁer.

3. Connect the (+) tweeter terminal of the left speaker to the FRONT LEFT (+) terminal on the power ampliﬁer and

the (+) woofer terminal of the left speaker to the SURROUND BACK LEFT (+) terminal on the power ampliﬁer.

4. Connect the (–) tweeter terminal of the left speaker to the FRONT LEFT (–) terminal on the power ampliﬁer and

the (–) woofer terminal of the left speaker to the SURROUND BACK LEFT (–) terminal on the power ampliﬁer.

Using Bi-amp Connection

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH

SPEAKER TERMINAL

AC INLET SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

INPUT

SELECT

FUSE

SURROUND BACK

RIGHT

SURROUND

RIGHT

12V TRIGGER

IN OUT

SURROUND

LEFT

CENTER FRONT

LEFT

SURROUND BACK

LEFT

FRONT

RIGHT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

INPUT

SELECT

OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

FRONT

RIGHT

OUTPUT

SURROUND BACK

RIGHT

FRONT

LEFT

SURROUND BACK

LEFT

OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

Left speakerRight speaker

Bi-wiring-enabled speakers

Power ampliﬁer

High range (Tweeter)

Low range (Woofer)

High range (Tweeter)

Low range (Woofer)

Installation and Connections

Connecting Antennas

This feature requires the tuner terminal board [K] to

be inserted in the RDC-7.1.

This chapter explains how to connect the supplied

indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to

connect commercially available outdoor FM and AM

antennas.

The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied

indoor FM antenna, try using a commercially available

outdoor FM antenna instead.

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/EBU

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

(

HD/BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/BNC

)

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

A B

232

OUT

FM antenna connector

AM antenna push terminals

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna

Attach the FM antenna, as shown.

■

USA and Canadian Models

■

Other Models

Once your RDC-7.1 is ready for use, you’ll need

to tune into an FM radio station and adjust the

position of the FM antenna to achieve the best

possible reception.

Use thumbtacks or something similar to

ﬁx the FM antenna into position.

Caution:

Be careful that you don’t injure

yourself when using thumbtacks.

75 Insert the plug fully

into the socket.

75 Insert the plug fully

into the socket

Thumbtacks,

etc.

Connecting Antennas

—Continued

The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use

only.

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied

indoor AM loop antenna, try using a commercially

available outdoor AM antenna.

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied

indoor FM antenna, try using a commercially available

outdoor FM antenna instead.

Notes:

•Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but acceptable

results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an attic

or loft.

•For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well away

from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line of sight to

your local FM transmitter.

•Outdoor antennas should be located away from possible

noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.

•For safety reasons, outdoor antennas should be situated well

away from power lines and other high voltage equipment.

•Outdoor antennas must be grounded in accordance with local

regulations to prevent electric shock hazards.

Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter

It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and

TV reception, as this can cause interference problems.

If circumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna

splitter, as shown.

If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied

AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used

in addition to the loop antenna, as shown.

Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed outside

horizontally, but good results can sometimes be obtained

indoors by mounting it horizontally above a window.

Note that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.

Outdoor antennas must be grounded in accordance with

local regulations to prevent electric shock hazards.

Connecting the AM Loop Antenna

Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting

the tabs into the base, as shown.

Connect both wires of the AM loop

antenna to the AM push terminals, as

shown.

(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so

they can be connected in either terminal)

Make sure that the wires are attached securely

and that the push terminals are gripping the bare

wires, not the insulation.

Once your RDC-7.1 is ready for use, you’ll need

to tune into an AM radio station and adjust the

position of the AM antenna to achieve the best

possible reception. Keep the antenna as far away

as possible from your RDC-7.1, TV, speaker

cables, and power cords.

Push Insert wire Release

Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna

Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna

To TV (or VCR)To AV receiver

TV/FM antenna splitter

Outdoor antenna (aerial)

Insulated antenna cable

AM loop antenna

Installation and Connections

Connecting AV Components

In addition to the conventional terminals, the RDC-7.1 has various terminals that are capable of next-generation digital

transmission.

Before connecting AV components to the RDC-7.1, make sure that your cable type matches the terminal shape and the

signal type and that the cable length is appropriate for the placement of your connected components.

Audio cables

*The audio input signal from the ETHERNET (Net-Tune) or MULTI-CH IN terminal will not be output to the HDMI

OUT terminal. Also, the DVD audio or SACD audio input signal from the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal will not be output

to the HDMI OUT terminal.

When you play a source in the remote zone (Zone 2 or Zone 3), the following restrictions are applied.

•When you play the audio signal supplied through the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, the audio signal will not be output

to Zone 2 or Zone 3. With this connection, you cannot record the audio signal from the source.

Types of Connection Cables and Terminals

Cable names Cable forms Terminals shapes Description

Optical cable

The connection using these cable types trans-

mits digital audio signals. There is no sound

quality difference among these cable types. In

general, the consumer models are equipped

with optical or coaxial terminals and the profes-

sional models are equipped with AES/EBU ter-

minals.

Note:

Some optical cables have their own covers.

Before making a connection, remove the cov-

ers. When plugging in a cable, be sure to match

the connector shape with the terminal shape.

Each optical terminal on the RDC-7.1 has its

own shutter-type cover. For the RDC-7.1, plug

in the optical cables so that the optical cable

connector pushes the terminal cover down.

Coaxial cable

AES/EBU

Balanced Cable

Audio connection

cable

This connection transmits an analog audio sig-

nal. Plug the red connector (R) into the right

channel terminal and the white connector (L)

into the left channel connector.

Multichannel con-

nection cable

The terminals for this cable type are for DVD

players that are compatible with the DVD-Audio

format. This connection transmits multichannel

analog audio signals.

i.LINK connection

cable (4-pin (S400)

type)

This connection can be used for connecting

i.LINK (AUDIO)-enabled devices and to transmit

digital audio signals. Also, multichannel analog

audio signals from DVD-Audio or Super Audio

CD format sources will be transmitted digitally.

The RDC-7.1 handles only audio signals

through i.LINK connection.

Ethernet cable

(CAT-5 Straight

type)

The Ethernet cable is used for connecting multi-

ple PCs or network-ready audio components

that constitute a local area network (LAN).

A LAN is a smaller network composed within a

house or building. The connecting terminals for

the Ethernet cables are often called “LAN port”

or “broadband port.”

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

Installation and Connections

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

•The audio input signal from the LAN port will be output only to the AUDIO OUT terminals as an analog source.

•When you play the audio signal from the PH or AUDIO IN terminals in Zone 3, the input source will be output only

to the AUDIO OUT terminals as an analog source. Similarly, in this connection, you can record only the audio signal

as an analog source through the AUDIO OUT terminals.

•When you play the audio signal from the DIGITAL IN terminals in Zone 2, the source will be downmixed into

2 channel analog audio signal and output to the AUDIO OUT terminals.

•When you play the audio signal from the DIGITAL IN terminals in Zone 3, only the PCM signal will be output as an

analog source to the AUDIO OUT terminals. Similarly, with this connection, you can record only the PCM signal as

an analog source through the AUDIO OUT terminals.

•The audio input signal from the HDMI IN terminal can be output to the HDMI OUT terminal.

•The audio input signal from the MULTI-CH IN terminals in Zone 2 will be downmixed into a 2 channel source for

output. You cannot play the source from the MULTI-CH IN terminals in Zone 3 and record it.

Video cables

Note:

When you play the source in the remote zone (Zone 2 or Zone 3), connect the TV or monitor to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO

2, or VIDEO 3 terminal.

Cable names Cable forms Terminals shapes Description

Component video

connection cable

(RCA type)

In this connection, the video signal is decom-

posed into three color difference signals (Y, Pb/

Cb, and Pr/Cr) and carried through three

cables, which provides better video quality than

the S Video connection.

The terminal shape for the component video

connection cable can be BNC-type or RCA-

type.

This connection cannot transmit information for

controlling video devices (e.g., aspect ratio).

Component video

connection cable

(BNC type)

S Video connection

cable

The video quality is better than with the com-

posite signal. In this connection, the RDC-7.1

cannot transmit the information for controlling

video devices (e.g., aspect ratio).

Video connection

cable This connection transmits the standard video

signal and is widely used for various video

devices such as TV and video recorder.

HDMI connection

cable This connection carries video signals digitally.

(Note that no audio signal is carried with this

unit.)

• Always refer to the instructions that came with the component that you are connecting.

• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been properly made.

• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Improper connections can result in noise, poor performance, or

damage to the equipment.

Example: Audio connection cable

• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with power cords and speaker cables. Doing so may adversely

affect the picture and sound quality.

Wrong!

Right!

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

For USA and Canadian models, this type of connection is only possible if an option board that has an appropriate

terminal is installed.

•This section describes the connections for displaying the video source or the operating information of the RDC-7.1

on a monitor device such as a TV or projector. Before making a connection, check the terminal types on the monitor

device and acquire the necessary cables by referring to page 31.

•The RDC-7.1 incorporates a video converter, which allows you to enjoy the video source even when the connections

between the playback device and the RDC-7.1 and between the RDC-7.1 and the monitors are different. When your

TV or monitor has various types of input terminals, use the connection with which you can get the best video quality

(For a model with no HDMI terminal, note that the input signal from the COMPONENT terminal will be output

only to the COMPONENT terminal).

•The VIDEO OUT 4 and S VIDEO OUT 4 terminals can be used only for Main room A.

•When you enjoy the video source in the remote zone (Zone 2 or Zone 3), the TV or monitor should be connected to

the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3 terminal.

*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.

Connecting Monitors such as TV or Projector

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/ BNC

)

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

232

OUT

VIDEO

IN S VIDEO

HDMI

YPBPRYPBPR

COMPONENT

VIDEO (RCA)

COMPONENT

VIDEO (BNC)

Make a connection using any of the terminals below.

*1 When connecting to the other S VIDEO OUT terminal, conﬁgure the video output

settings accordingly using the Video Output Assign sub-menu (See page 96).

*2 When connecting to the other VIDEO OUT terminal, conﬁgure the video output

settings accordingly using the Video Output Assign sub-menu (See page 96).

*3 European and Asian models only.

Monitor device such as TV

for Main room B

Monitor device such as TV

for Zone 2

Monitor device such as TV

for Zone 3

Monitor device

such as TV and

projector for

Main room A

Installation and Connections

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

For USA and Canadian models, this type of connection is only possible if an option board that has an appropriate

terminal is installed.

•When connecting a DVD player to the RDC-7.1, make connections for video and audio signals using digital and

analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to pages 30, 31 for correct connections.

•When you want to perform analog recording of the audio signal from a DVD player or operate your -compatible

IntegraRESEARCH products via connections with the RDC-7.1, you have to make analog audio signal connec-

tions. Connect the audio output terminals on the DVD player to the AUDIO IN terminals on the RDC-7.1 using ana-

log audio cables (RCA/phono).

•This section shows the connection example when you use the default settings of the RDC-7.1. However, you can

connect a DVD player to other terminals within the same terminal section on the RDC-7.1. In such case, remember

to conﬁgure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98) and the video input assignment

in the Video Assign sub-menu (See page 99).

•For a model without a HDMI terminal, when you connect a DVD player to the COMPONENT terminals, be sure to

use the COMPONENT terminal to connect a TV or projector.

*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.

*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

Connecting a DVD Player

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

EMULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

AUDIO IN

LR RL

GND

OUT

FGL

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

(

HD/ BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/ BNC

)

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

INLET

(

SINGLE

)

A B

232

OUT

YPBPR

COMPONENT

OUT (RCA)

VIDEO

OUT

FRONT SURR

SURR BACK

ANALOG

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

OUT

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUTMULTICH OUT

OPTICAL

HDMI

OUT

When connecting to other audio terminals

within the same terminal section, conﬁgure

the audio input settings accordingly using the

Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98).

When connecting to other video terminals

within the same terminal section, conﬁgure

the video input settings accordingly using the

Video Assign sub-menu (See page 99).

DVD player

Audio Output Video Output

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

For USA and Canadian models, this type of connection is only possible if an option board that has an appropriate

terminal is installed.

•When connecting a DVD recorder or digital VCR to the RDC-7.1, make connections for video and audio signals

using digital and analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to pages 30, 31 for correct connections.

•This section shows the connections example when you use the VIDEO 1 as an input. In this case, you do not need

additional configurations. When connecting to other terminals within the same terminal section on the RDC-

7.1,

conﬁgure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98), the video input assignment in the

Video Assign sub-menu (See page 99), the audio output assignment in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page

95), and the video output assignment in the Video Output Assign sub-menu (See page 96).

•You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 101).

•When you want to perform analog recording of the audio signal from the digital device, you have to make analog

audio signal connections. Connect the audio output terminals on the digital device to the AUDIO IN terminals on the

RDC-7.1 using analog audio cables (RCA/phono).

•For a model without a HDMI terminal, when you connect a DVD recorder or digital VCR to the COMPONENT ter-

minals, be sure to use the COMPONENT terminals to connect a TV or projector.

*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.

*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 1 as input

Connecting a DVD Recorder or Digital VCR (VIDEO 1)

(

ASSIGNABLE

) (

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

EMULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

AUDIO IN

LR RL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

(

HD/ BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/ BNC

)

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

AC INLET

(

SINGLE

)

A B

232

OUT

YPBPR

COMPONENT

OUT (RCA)

ANALOG

S VIDEO

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN

ANALOG

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO OUT

Digital video recorder

(DVD recorder, digital VCR)

When connecting to other

audio terminals within the

same terminal section, con-

ﬁgure the audio input settings

accordingly using the Audio

Assign sub-menu (See page

98).

When connecting to other audio ter-

minals within the same terminal

section, conﬁgure the audio output

settings accordingly using the

Audio Output Assign sub-menu

(See page 95).

When connecting to other video

terminals within the same termi-

nal section, conﬁgure the video

input settings accordingly using

the Video Assign sub-menu (See

page 99).

When connecting to other video

terminals within the same termi-

nal section, conﬁgure the video

output settings accordingly using

the Video Output Assign sub-

menu (See page 96).

Audio Output Video Output

Audio Input Video Input

Installation and Connections

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

For USA and Canadian models, this type of connection is only possible if an option board that has an appropriate

terminal is installed.

•When connecting a VCR to the RDC-7.1, make connections for video and audio signals. Before making connec-

tions, refer to pages 30, 31 for correct connections.

•This section shows the connection example when you use the VIDEO 2 or VIDEO 3 as an input. In this case, you do

not need additional configurations. When connecting to other terminals within the same terminal section on the

RDC-7.1, conﬁgure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98), the video input assign-

ment in the Video Assign sub-menu (See page 99), the audio output assignment in the Audio Output Assign menu

(See page 95), and the video output assignment in the Video Output Assign menu (See page 96).

•You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 101).

•For a model without a HDMI terminal, when you connect a VCR to the COMPONENT terminals, be sure to use the

COMPONENT terminals to connect a TV or projector.

*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.

*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 2 as input

Connecting a VCR (VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3)

(

ASSIGNABLE

) (

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

EMULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

(

HD/ BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/ BNC

)

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

AC INLET

(

SINGLE

)

A B

232

OUT

ANALOG

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT

YPBPR

COMPONENT

VIDEO (RCA)

ANALOG

S VIDEO

AUDIO IN

ANALOG

AUDIO OUT S VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO OUT

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

VCR

When connecting to other

audio terminals within the

same terminal section, conﬁg-

ure the audio input settings

accordingly using the Audio

Assign sub-menu (See page

98).

When connecting to other audio terminals

within the same terminal section, conﬁgure

the audio output settings accordingly using

the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page

95).

When connecting to other

video terminals within the

same terminal section, con-

ﬁgure the video input settings

accordingly using the Video

Assign sub-menu (See page

99).

When connecting to other video ter-

minals within the same terminal

section, conﬁgure the video output

settings accordingly using the Video

Output Assign sub-menu (See page

96).

For digital

VCR

Audio Output Video Output

Audio Input Video Input

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

(

ASSIGNABLE

) (

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

EMULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

AUDIO IN

LR RL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/ BNC

)

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

AC INLET

(

SINGLE

)

A B

232

OUT

YPBPR

COMPONENT

OUT (BNC)

ANALOG S VIDEO

AUDIO IN

ANALOG

AUDIO OUT S VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO OUT

DIGITAL

OPTICAL

When connecting to other

audio terminals within the

same terminal section, conﬁg-

ure the audio input settings

accordingly using the Audio

Assign sub-menu (See page

98).

When connecting to other audio termi-

nals within the same terminal section,

conﬁgure the audio output settings

accordingly using the Audio Output

Assign sub-menu (See page 95).

When connecting to other

video terminals within the

same terminal section, con-

ﬁgure the video input set-

tings accordingly using the

Video Assign sub-menu

(See page 99).

When connecting to other video ter-

minals within the same terminal sec-

tion, conﬁgure the video output

settings accordingly using the Video

Output Assign sub-menu (See page

96).

For digital

VCR

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 3 as input

VCR

European and Asian models use the BNC type component terminals, and other models use the RCA type.

Audio Output Video Output

Audio Input Video Input

Installation and Connections

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

For USA and Canadian models, this type of connection is only possible if an option board that has an appropriate

terminal is installed.

•When connecting a DBS tuner, DBS TV, or BS/CS tuner to the RDC-7.1, make connections for video and audio sig-

nals using digital and analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to pages 30, 31 for correct connections.

•This section shows the connection example when you use the VIDEO 4 or VIDEO 5 as an input. In this case, you do

not need additional conﬁgurations. When connecting to other terminals within the same terminal section on the

RDC-7.1, remember to conﬁgure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98) and the

video input assignment in the Video Assign sub-menu (See page 99). When you use the S VIDEO terminal for con-

nection, you should conﬁgure the Video Assign sub-menu.

•You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 101).

•For a model without a slot for the HDMI terminal, when you connect a BS/CS tuner or LD player to the COMPO-

NENT terminals, be sure to use the COMPONENT terminals to connect a TV or projector.

*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.

*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

Connecting a DBS Tuner, DBS TV, or BS/CS Tuner

(

ASSIGNABLE

) (

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

EMULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

(

HD/ BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/ BNC

)

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

AC INLET

(

SINGLE

)

A B

232

OUT

ANALOG

DIGITAL

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO OUT

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUTAUDIO OUT

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 5 as input

When connecting to other audio termi-

nals within the same terminal section,

conﬁgure the audio input settings

accordingly using the Audio Assign

sub-menu (See page 98).

When connecting to other video termi-

nals within the same terminal section,

conﬁgure the video input settings

accordingly using the Video Assign

sub-menu (See page 99).

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 4 as input

When connecting to other

audio terminals within the

same terminal section, con-

ﬁgure the audio input settings

accordingly using the Audio

Assign sub-menu (See page

98).

When connecting to other

video terminals within the

same terminal section, con-

ﬁgure the video input set-

tings accordingly using the

Video Assign sub-menu

(See page 99).

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

•When connecting a CD player to the RDC-7.1, make connections using digital or analog terminals. Before making

connections, refer to pages 30, 31 for correct connections. This section shows the connection example when you use

the default audio input assignment settings. However, when you use coaxial cables for digital audio signals, connect

the CD player to any terminal between the AUDIO IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 1 and 6, and remember to conﬁgure the

audio input assignment settings in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98).

•When connecting a turntable, use the PH terminal. The PH terminal on the RDC-7.1 is designed for turntables that

use a moving magnet (MM) cartridge. When you want to use a turntable with a moving coil (MC) cartridge, connect

the turntable through a step-up transformer or head ampliﬁer.

•If you assign other terminals to the PHONO input source, you need to conﬁgure the audio input assignment settings

in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98).

•When a turntable is equipped with a ground wire, connect the wire to the GND terminal on the RDC-7.1. However,

some turntables may produce noise when the ground wire is connected to the RDC-7.1. In such a case, you do not

have to connect the ground wire.

•When you want to perform analog recording of the audio signal or operate your -compatible IntegraRESEARCH

products via connections with the RDC-7.1, you have to make analog audio signal connections. Connect the

audio output terminals on the source device to the AUDIO IN terminals on the RDC-7.1 using analog audio cables

(RCA/phono).

Connecting a CD Player, Turntable or Tuner

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

EMULTI

-CH

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

FGL

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/ BNC

)

ANTENNA

A B

ANALOG

DIGITAL

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT

GNDGND

When connecting to other audio terminals

within the same terminal section, conﬁgure

the audio input settings accordingly using the

Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98).

CD Player Turntable

Installation and Connections

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

•When connecting a MD recorder, DAT deck or CD recorder to the RDC-7.1, make connections using digital or ana-

log terminals. Before making connections, refer to page 30 for correct connections.

•Connect a cassette or DAT tape deck to TAPE1, and an MD or CD recorder to TAPE 2.

•When you connect a cassette deck to the RDC-7.1, be sure to use only analog audio terminals. In the initial settings,

no terminal of this unit is assigned to a REC terminal of the cassette deck. To achieve the assignment, connect the

REC terminal of the cassette deck to any of the AUDIO OUT 1 to 5 terminals and set the terminal to “Tape 1 Rec

Out” in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page 95). In addition, you can switch the input source “TAPE2” to

MD or CDR. Press the [Tape 2] button on the front panel to display “TAPE 2,” then press the [Tape 2] button again

and hold it for 3 seconds. This changes the display to “MD.” If you wish to change it to “CDR,” release the button

once, and press and hold it again for 3 seconds. This operation enables you to operate Onkyo MD or CD recorders

with the remote controller of this unit (Please note that the connection is required).

•When connecting to other terminals, remember to conﬁgure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-

menu (See page 98) and the audio output assignment in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page 95).

•You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 101).

•When you want to perform analog recording of an audio signal or operate your -compatible IntegraRESEARCH

products via connections with the RDC-7.1, you have to make analog audio signal connections. Connect the

audio output terminals on the source device to the AUDIO IN terminals on the RDC-7.1 using analog audio cables

(RCA/phono).

Connecting a Recording Device such as MD Recorder, DAT Deck, CD Recorder

or Cassette Deck

(

ASSIGNABLE

) (

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

EMULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

(

HD/ BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

AC INLET

(

SINGLE

)

A B

232

OUT

ANALOG

DIGITAL

OPTICAL

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

DIGITAL

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

AUDIO OUT

DIGITAL

OPTICAL

AUDIO IN

DIGITAL

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUT

Example for connecting with the TAPE 1 as input

Example for connecting to the TAPE 2 as input

When connecting to other digital audio

terminals or to other analog audio out-

put terminals, conﬁgure the audio out-

put settings accordingly using the Audio

Output Assign sub-menu (See page 95).

When connecting to other audio

terminals within the same terminal

section, conﬁgure the audio input

settings accordingly using the

Audio Assign sub-menu (See page

98).

When connecting to other digital audio

terminals or to other analog audio out-

put terminals, conﬁgure the audio out-

put settings accordingly using the

Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See

When connecting to other audio

terminals within the same terminal

section, conﬁgure the audio input

settings accordingly using the

Audio Assign sub-menu (See page

98).

Cassette deck or DAT deck

MD recorder or CD recorder

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

What is i.LINK

i.LINK is an appellation of IEEE1394, which is the digital interface standard deﬁned by the Institute of Electrical and

Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

Connecting i.LINK

(AUDIO)-supported devices allows high speed transfer of data such as digital sound between the

linked devices, and their control.

What is i.LINK (AUDIO)

The RDC-7.1 supports “i.LINK (AUDIO)” of the i.LINK transfer format. Accordingly, “i.LINK (AUDIO)” must also

be supported for other devices that you want to connect to the RDC-7.1. The RDC-7.1 does not support other i.LINK

transfer formats such as “MPEG-2 TS” used for BS digital broadcasts or “DV” used for DVD recorders, digital video,

etc. The RDC-7.1 connected to other i.LINK(AUDIO)-supported devices via i.LINK cable enables you to transfer

multichannel digital sound such as DVD-Audio and SACD (video signal is not supported).

Even when multiple devices are connected to each other, you can perform data transfer and control of target devices via

another device.

The IEEE interfaces on the RDC-7.1 are designed conforming to the standards below.

1. IEEE Std 1394a-2000, Standard for a High Performance Serial Bus

2. IEC60958 bitstream, DVD-Audio, and SACD in the AM824 Sequence adaptation layers of Audio and Music Data

Transmission Protocol 2.0

The RDC-7.1 supports the DTCP (Digital Transmission Contents Protection) system. The DTCP system uses technol-

ogies for data encryption and authentication during the data transfer between the i.LINK-connected digital devices in

order to protect the copyright of the content against illegal duplication. To enjoy replaying DVD-Audio, etc., the DTCP

must also be supported by other devices connected to the RDC-7.1.

How to Make a Connection through the i.LINK (AUDIO) Interface

Use the S400 4-pin i.LINK cable to connect the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal on the RDC-7.1 to the i.LINK (AUDIO)

terminal on the i.LINK (AUDIO)-enabled device.

•When using the i.LINK connection, you need to conﬁgure the audio input assignment settings in the “i.LINK” sec-

tion of the Audio Assign sub-menu (Some i.LINK-connected devices may require audio output settings).

•The RDC-7.1 supports only audio signal transmission through the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface. When connecting

video devices, you need to make a connection using other terminals for video signal.

Connection Using the i.LINK (AUDIO) Terminal ( ) (Other than Chinese model)

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

EMULTI

-CH

DIGITAL INDIGITAL IN

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

FGL

HDM

is a t

or re

trade

Lice

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUT

(

HD/ BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

A B

VIDEO OUT

In addition to the i.LINK

audio connection,

make sure to connect

the terminals for

images such as VIDEO

and/or S VIDEO

terminals.

Note:

If any other IntegraRESEARCH product is connected to the

RDC-7.1 via i.LINK, system operation can be achieved via i.LINK

cable. In that case, disconnect the connection as it may intro-

duce errors.

Installation and Connections

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

Interconnection of i.LINK (AUDIO)-supported Devices

The i.LINK connection allows for data transfer, even if the RDC-7.1 is connected to other devices via another i.LINK

(AUDIO)-supported device. You can connect up to 17 devices in a daisy chain (in-line) connection arrangement using

the i.LINK connection.

Note:

•Do not connect any devices that do not support i.LINK (AUDIO), such as “MPEG-2 TS” ready devices used for BS

digital broadcasts and “DV” ready devices used for digital video, etc.

•Do not connect/disconnect i.LINK cable to or from other devices, connect additional devices, or turn them on/off

while any i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device is playing. Otherwise, the audio sound may be interrupted.

•Some i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready devices cannot transfer data when the power mode is set to standby or off. Refer to

the individual User Manual of the i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device you want to connect.

•i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready devices have their own maximum data transfer rate: either S100 (100 Mbps*), S200 (200

Mbps*) or S400 (400 Mbps*). The rate label is located near the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminals. The RDC-7.1 has a

maximum data transfer rate of 400 Mbps. However, this may decrease depending on the speciﬁcations or the maxi-

mum data transfer rate of devices connected to the RDC-7.1. It is recommended to connect devices with the same

maximum data transfer rate.

*“Mbps” stands for “mega bits per second” which indicates the maximum data size transferred per second. For example, 400 Mbps

indicates that 400 mega bits of data can be transferred every second.

•The i.LINK feature does not assure successful connectivity between all i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready devices. Successful

data transfer and control signal communications depend on the individual features of each device.

... up to 17 devices

Example:

... up to 63 devices

For devices in a branched connection arrangement, you can connect up to 63, as long as they have three or more

i.LINK (AUDIO) terminals.

RDC-7.1

i.LINK-ready DVD player i.LINK-ready BS tuner

RDC-7.1

i.LINK-ready DVD player i.LINK-ready BS tuner

i.LINK-ready MD recorder

i.LINK (AUDIO)-

ready device

i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready

device

i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready

device

i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready

device

i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready

device

Be sure to avoid the looped connection arrangement of devices as shown below. The output signals should not be

returned to the original signal output device, which may cause device failure.

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

How to Conﬁgure i.LINK Connections

Selecting a Device

When the i.LINK connection is ready, you can use the setup menu to select any device which is connected via i.LINK.

Once you have conﬁgured the i.LINK setting, the next time you select the input source, it will be selected as the play-

ing source.

Using Remote Control

1. Press the [Input] button, and then turn the scroll wheel to select any source for setting.

2. Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [Setup] button.

3. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Input Setup,” and then press the [Enter] button.

4. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Audio Assign,” and then press the [Enter] button.

5. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “g. i.LINK.”

6. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select any device.

If you do not want to hear audio sound regardless if the i.LINK connection is ready, select “No.”

Using Control Buttons on the RDC-7.1

1. Select any input source, and then press the [Setup] button.

2. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Input Setup,” and then press the [Enter] button.

3. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Audio Assign,” and then press the [Enter] button.

4. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “g. i.LINK,” and then press the [Enter] button.

5. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select any device.

If you do not want to hear audio sound regardless if the i.LINK connection is ready, select “No.”

Using Useful Functions While the i.LINK Connection is Ready

If any other IntegraRESEARCH product is connected to the RDC-7.1 via i.LINK and assigned as a input source

(Audio Assign), you can use the following functions. The connection must be disconnected to use them.

i.LINK Selector Change

When the i.LINK-connected device starts playing, the input source will automatically be changed to the one assigned

to the device even if another input source has been selected. See page 121 for detailed operations.

Note:

You cannot hear audio sound of i.LINK-connected devices in Zone 2.

Control of DVD Player

You can control a DVD player by emitting signals from the remote controller to the RDC-7.1.

Auto Start (Wakeup Setup)

While the RDC-7.1 is in standby mode, you can conﬁgure the setting of any i.LINK-connected device. See page 121

for detailed operations.

OSD for DVD

If DVD player is connected to the RDC-7.1 via i.LINK, you can output the OSD of the RDC-7.1 on a TV, even if a

DVD player is directly connected to the TV. You can conﬁgure the setting to specify the display area on the TV, for

example, right or left side of the screen. When multiple devices are connected, you can select any speciﬁc device

through which the output is sent. This function is also available in Zone 2. See page 121 for detailed operations.

Note:

While the OSD for DVD is used, do not change mode to standby, nor turn on/off the player.

System Control Setup

You can select on/off of the i.LINK (AUDIO) output of a DVD player from the RDC-7.1. See page 121 for detailed

operations.

Notes on “DTCP ERROR XXXX” Message

“DTCP ERROR XXXX” message (where “XXXX” is a device name) indicates that the connected device does not

support DTCP (Digital Transmission Contents Protection). In this case follow the procedure described below.

1. From the Setup Menu, select “6. i.LINK Setup”

→

“6-1. Wakeup Setup” to set “a. Wakeup on i.LINK (IEEE1394)”

to “Disable.”

2. Disconnect the device from the main unit by removing the i.LINK cable from the rear panel.

3. Press the [Standby/On] button so that the main unit enters the Standby mode.

Installation and Connections

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

This feature requires the HDMI terminal board [L] to be inserted in the RDC-7.1.

About the HDMI (High Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface)

The High Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) is an interface standard for next-generation TV, designed to connect

between STB (Set Top Box) and display digitally in the home, responding to technological changes such as digitaliza-

tion of TV broadcasting.

In addition to the existing features provided by the Digital Visual Interface (DVI)

standard, HDMI allows transmission

of both audio and control signals. Moreover, multiple cables are required for video, audio, and control signals in con-

ventional connections, but the HDMI interface allows you to make a connection through a single HDMI cable, thus

enabling transfer of digital video and sound data between HDMI-supported devices.

In principle, the HDMI video stream (video signals) is compatible with the DVI. You can use the HDMI-DVI conversion

cables to connect with TVs or monitors that are outﬁtted with DVI terminals, though video images may not be visible

depending on the combination of devices. The RDC-7.1 uses HDCP; you can enjoy pictures on HDCP ready monitors.

The HDMI interfaces on the RDC-7.1 are designed to conform to the standards below.

High-Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface Speciﬁcation Informational Version 1.0

The RDC-7.1 supports High-bandwidth Digital Contents Protection (HDCP)

, technology to protect copyright of dig-

ital video signals against illegal duplication. HDCP must also be supported on the devices connected to the RDC-7.1.

Use the HDMI cable supplied with the product or those from the marketplace to connect the HDMI OUT terminal on

the RDC-7.1 with the HDMI input terminals on TVs or monitors.

*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by DDWG

in 1999.

*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents Protection): The video data encryption technology for DVI developed by

Intel. This technology is designed to protect the video content and a HDCP-compliant DVI receiver is required to

play the encrypted video content.

*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): The standardization group for digital interface for display, operated

mainly by Intel, Silicon Image, FUJITSU, and Hewlett-Packard (Compaq Computer).

How to Make a Connection through the HDMI Interface

Use the HDMI cable to connect the HDMI terminals on the RDC-7.1 and a HDMI-enabled device such as a DVD player,

TV, or projector.

Set HDMI to 1 or 2 in the Video Assign sub-menu according to the connected device you wish to use. In the initial

settings, 1 is assigned to DVD, and 2 to Video 1.

Basically, the HDMI can transmit audio signals. However in order to playback the audio signal with the RDC-7.1, make

a separate digital connection with a DVD player or other devices, since the RDC-7.1 cannot playback any audio signals

supplied from its HDMI IN 1/2 terminals.

•When other input source than 1 or 2 is selected, analog/digital audio signals and analog video signals will be con-

verted into the HDMI format and output through the HDMI OUT terminal (In the initial settings, no audio signal is

output. Appropriate setting should be made in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu).

•Analog audio signals will be output in the PCM format. Digital audio signals will be output through the HDMI OUT

terminal only if the connected TV or projector can playback the digital audio signals.

A TV or projector that supports PCM audio signals only, for example, cannot playback audio signals in the Dolby

Digital format supplied as an input source to the RDC-7.1. In order to properly playback the audio signals in this

case, the player should be conﬁgured to output the PCM signals.

When an analog audio connection is made on the RDC-7.1, analog audio signal is output in the PCM format.

Connection Using HDMI Terminals

Connecting AV Components

—Continued

Notes:

•Any input video signal that is not supplied through the HDMI IN terminal (analog video input) will be present on

the HDMI OUT terminal with its original resolution. Therefore, it will not be displayed on the monitor that is not

compatible with the resolution. In this case, adjust the resolution of the input video signal on the source video

device.

•The RDC-7.1 is designed to suppress the audio signal whose audio format is not supported with the monitor. How-

ever, when a supported digital audio signal is supplied, the monitor may produce unwanted noisy sound at the time

the sampling frequency or signal format is switched. In this case, disable the audio output and enable the sound from

the speakers built in the monitor.

Connection example when the source selection is performed on the RDC-7.1

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT

HDMI

OUT

NENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

232

OUT

HDMI

OUT

HDMI

OUT

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO

ANTENNA

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

232

OUT

HDMI

OUT

Before making a connection, read the

DVD instruction manual thoroughly.

Connection example for higher video quality

When connecting an AV component equipped with the HDMI input terminal, you can use the connecting layout shown below.

Before making a connection, read the instruction manual of the connected device thoroughly.

DVD Player with HDMI

INPUT and OUTPUT

TV or Projector

RDC-7.1

TV or Projector

DVD Player with HDMI OUTPUT

Set Top Box with HDMI OUTPUT

RDC-7.1

Tips:

To enable HDMI audio output of the

RDC-7.1 from the TV speakers,

enable HDMI Out according to

“HDMI Out” on page 96.

Installation and Connections

Connecting -compatible AV Components

The

terminal on the RDC-7.1 is for connecting other

IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo components equipped with

the same

terminal. When a component is connected

to the

terminal, it can be operated by the remote

controller supplied with the RDC-7.1. In addition, when

you connect a component to the

terminal, you can

also perform the system operations given below.

Power on/ready function

When the RDC-7.1 is in the standby state, if an

connected component is turned on, the RDC-7.1 also

turns on and the input source selected at the RDC-7.1

automatically switches to that component.

Direct change function

When the play button is pressed on an

-connected

component, the input source selected at the RDC-7.1

automatically changes to that component.

Power off function

When the RDC-7.1 is placed in the standby state, all

-connected components are also automatically put

into the standby state.

Also, if you press the [On] button on the RDC-7.1

remote controller while the RDC-7.1 is turned on, all

-connected components (DVD players, CD players,

MD recorders, tuners, etc.) are also turned on.

To connect components using the

terminal, simply

connect a remote control cable from this

terminal to

the

terminal of the other component. An

remote

control cable with a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) miniature two-

conductor plug comes with every cassette tape deck,

compact disc player, MD recorder, and DVD player that

has an

terminal.

• When performing operations with

-connected

components using the

system, do not use the

remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3).

• For remote control operation, the audio connection

cables must also be connected.

• If a component has two

terminals, you can use

either one to connect to the RDC-7.1. The other one

can be used to daisy chain with another component.

• With IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo DVD players, you

can enter the pre-program code so that you can operate

the DVD player directly with the remote controller

without connecting the

terminals (See page 129).

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

EMULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/EBU

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

(

HD/BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/BNC

)

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UPP

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

232

OUT

ANTENNA

REMOTE

CONTROL

ANALOG

OUTPUT

AUDIO IN

REMOTE

CONTROL

IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo

DVD player

Remote

control

cable

Connections for Remote Control ( )

REMOTE

CONTROL

RDC-7.1

Ex: Onkyo CD player

connector

Ex: Onkyo cassette

tape deck

Remote control cable

Connecting Components not Reached by the Remote

Controller Signals (IR IN)

– USA and Canadian models –

In order to use the remote controller to control the

RDC-7.1 from a remote location, you will need to pre-

pare a multiroom kit (sold separately) such as one

listed below:

• Multiroom kits such as those made by Niles

and

Xantech

RF Receivers can also be used with the remote controller

to control the RDC-7.1 from a remote location. To use

RF Receivers, set the Transmission Signal Format set-

ting to “RF” (See page 141 for details).

Effective Sensor Layout

Example for the main room

If the RDC-7.1 is located inside a cabinet or other enclosure

where the infrared rays from the remote controller cannot

enter, then operation with the remote controller will not be

possible. In such a case, it will be necessary to install a

remote sensor at a location outside of the cabinet so that the

infrared rays from the controller can be sensed.

Example for the remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3)

The IR IN input allows you to control the RDC-7.1 from

the remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3) with the remote

controller even though the remote zone may be on the

other side of the building from the main zone. The

diagram below shows how to make the proper

connections for the remote zone.

Effective Sensor Connections

When connecting a multiroom kit, use the IR connection

Phoenix (Pluggable connector) terminal (smaller one)

supplied with the RDC-7.1.

Connect the ribbon cable from the connecting block to

the IR connection Phoenix terminal.

1. Loosen the screws using a ﬂatblade screwdriver to

open the shutters.

2. Connect the white wire to the MAIN, ZONE 2 or

ZONE 3 terminal according to the room where the

multiroom kit is used, and then close the shutter.

3. Connect the red wire to the +12V terminal, and then

close the shutter. If you use more than one multi

room kit in different rooms such as MAIN and

ZONE 2, connect all the red wires to the +12V ter-

minal together.

4. Connect the black wire to the GND terminal, and

then close the shutter. If you use more than one

multi-room kit in different rooms, connect all the

black wires to the GND terminal together.

When the multiroom kits are used for all the rooms

5. As shown in the illustration below, connect the Phoe-

nix terminal ﬁrmly to the IR IN socket on the

RDC-7.1.

If Remote Controller Signal Does not

Reach the RDC-7.1 Remote Sensor

Connecting

block

IR Receiver

Remote controller

IR IN

RDC-7.1

In the

cabinet

: Signal ﬂow

Main room

IR Receiver

Remote controller

Connecting

block

RDC-7.1

Main room Zone 2/Zone 3 room

: Signal ﬂow

To IR IN

+12V

GND

Flatblade

screwdriver

Red

Black

White

Ribbon cable

+12V

MAIN

GND

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

From Main room Red

White

Red

White

Red

White

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

AUDIO

The

i.LINK

logo

trademarks

Sony

Corporation, registered

the

U.S.

and

other

countries.

S400

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

MULTI

-CH

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

OUT

ANTENNA

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

A B

UDD

232

GND

TRIGGER

OUT

100mA MAX.

TOTAL

100mA MAX.

200mA MAX.

12 V

TRIGGER

OUT

V DC PWR SUPPLY

MAIN

GND

ZONE

20mA MAX.

Push the connec-

tor into the socket

until it clicks.

Installation and Connections

Using an External Device with 12V Trigger Terminal

– USA and Canadian models –

You can turn on the AV devices connected to the

RDC-7.1 automatically using the output signal from the

12V TRIGGER OUT terminal on the RDC-7.1.

Making a Connection

You can connect up to ﬁve devices to the 12V TRIGGER

Phoenix (Pluggable Connector) terminal (larger one)

and one device to the 12V TRIGGER OUT E terminal

(mini-jack).

You can connect any external devices to the RDC-7.1

whether the connected device is located in the main,

Zone 2 or Zone 3 room.

There are ﬁve terminals for connecting external

devices and their maximum current allowed to be

connected are as follows:

Up to 200 mA.

B, C and D:

Up to 100 mA each.

Up to 100 mA for the total current value of both the

Phoenix and mini-jack terminals.

Before connecting an external device, check that the cur-

rent value for the 12V TRIGGER terminal of the con-

nected device does not exceed the target terminal’s

maximum current above.

When using the 12V TRIGGER Phoenix (Pluggable

Connector) terminal:

1. Loosen the screws using a ﬂatblade screwdriver to

open the shutters.

2. Connect the GND wire (black) to the GND terminal,

and close the shutter.

3. Connect the remaining wire to any of the terminals

between A and E, and close the shutter.

4. When you connect more than one external device,

you can connect all the GND wires to the GND ter-

minal together.

5. Connect the Phoenix terminal ﬁrmly to the 12V

TRIGGER OUT socket on the RDC-7.1.

6. After making connections, you have to conﬁgure the

association between the room where the device is

used and the device to be turned on. For performing

this setting, refer to “12V Trigger Assign” of “Input

Setup” section on page 102.

When connecting the IntegraRESEARCH’s RDA-7.1

power ampliﬁer:

Connect the ampliﬁer to the 12V TRIGGER OUT A

200mA MAX terminal.

When using the mini-jack 12V TRIGGER OUT E

terminal:

When you want to connect two devices to both the Phoe-

nix terminal E and mini-jack terminal simultaneously,

you can connect them as long as the total current value of

their 12V TRIGGER terminals will not exceed 100 mA

GND

Flatblade

screwdriver

Wire

GND

200mA MAX

100mA MAX

TOTAL 100mA MAX

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

AUDIO

The

i.LINK

logo

trademarks

Sony

Corporation, registered

the

U.S.

and

other

countries.

S400

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

MULTI

-CH

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

OUT

ANTENNA

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

A B

UDD

232

GND

TRIGGER

OUT

100mA MAX.

TOTAL

100mA MAX.

200mA MAX.

12 V

TRIGGER

OUT

V DC PWR SUPPLY

MAIN

GND

ZONE

20mA MAX.

Push the connector

into the socket until

it clicks.

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

AUDIO

The

i.LINK

logo

trademarks

Sony

Corporation, registered

the

U.S.

and

other

countries.

S400

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

MULTI

-CH

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

OUT

ANTENNA

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

A B

UDD

232

12 V

TRIGGER

OUT

V DC PWR SUPPLY

MAIN

GND

ZONE

20mA MAX.

GND

TRIGGER

OUT

100mA MAX.

TOTAL

100mA MAX.

200mA MAX.

232

V DC PWR SUPPLY

MAIN

GND

ZONE

TRIGGER

OUT

20mA MAX.

12 V

TRIGGER

OUT

12V TRIGGER

Device

Connecting Components not Reached by the

Remote Controller Signals (IR IN/OUT)

– Other than USA and Canadian models –

In order to use the remote controller to control the

RDC-7.1 from a remote location, you will need to pre-

pare a multiroom kit (sold separately) such as one

listed below:

• Multiroom kits such as those made by Niles

and

Xantech

RF Receivers can also be used with the remote controller

to control the RDC-7.1 from a remote location. To use

RF Receivers, set the Transmission Signal Format set-

ting to “RF” (See page 141 for details).

Effective Sensor Layout

Example for the main room

If the RDC-7.1 is located inside a cabinet or other enclosure

where the infrared rays from the remote controller cannot

enter, then operation with the remote controller will not be

possible. In such a case, it will be necessary to install a

remote sensor at a location outside of the cabinet so that the

infrared rays from the controller can be sensed.

Example for the remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3)

The IR IN input allows you to control the RDC-7.1 from

the remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3) with the remote

controller even though the remote zone may be on the

other side of the building from the main zone. The

diagram below shows how to make the proper

connections for the remote zone.

Making Sensor Connections

When you place the IR receiver in the main room,

connect the cable from the connecting block to the IR IN

MAIN terminal. When you place the IR receiver in the

remote zone, connect the cable from the connecting

block to the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 terminal accordingly.

Make the connection as shown below. Do not plug any

equipment into the power outlet until all the connections

are complete.

If Remote Controller Signal Does not

Reach the RDC-7.1 Remote Sensor

Connecting

block

IR Receiver

Remote controller

IR IN

RDC-7.1

In the

cabinet

: Signal ﬂow

Main room

IR Receiver

Remote controller

Connecting

block

RDC-7.1

Main room Zone 2/Zone 3 room

: Signal ﬂow

To IR IN

MAIN

ZONE

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

OUT

RDC-7.1

from connecting block

Mini plug cable

Installation and Connections

Effective Sensor Layout

In this situation, you will need to use a commercially

available IR emitter. Connect the mini plug of the IR

emitter to the IR OUT terminal on the RDC-7.1 and

then place the IR emitter on the remote sensor of the

component or facing it. When the IR emitter is con-

nected, only the signal input to the IR IN terminal is

output to the IR OUT terminal. The signal input from

the remote sensor on the front of the RDC-7.1 will not

be output to the IR OUT terminal.

Making Sensor Connections

When you place the IR receiver in the main room, con-

nect the cable from the connecting block to the IR OUT

MAIN terminal. When you place the IR receiver in the

remote zone, connect the cable from the connecting

block to the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 terminal accordingly.

Using an External

Device with 12V Trigger

Terminal

– Other than USA and

Canadian models –

You can automatically turn on the connected AV com-

ponents with the output signal from the RDC-7.1’s 12V

TRIGGER OUT terminal.

Making a Connection

Connect the 12V TRIGGER OUT terminal on the

RDC-7.1 to the 12V TRIGGER IN terminal on other

components. Every 12V TRIGGER OUT terminal can

be connected to the components whether they are

placed in the main room, Zone 2, or Zone 3.

The RDC-7.1 has ﬁve 12V TRIGGER OUT terminals

and the maximum currents to be connected are as fol-

lows:

200 mA

B, C, D and E:

100 mA

After making connections, conﬁgure the association

between the room (zone) and the component to be

turned on (Refer to “12V Trigger Assign” under “Input

Setup” on page 102).

If Remote Controller Signal Does not

Reach Other Components

IR Receiver

Remote controller

Connecting

block

IR IN

IR OUT IR Emitter

RDC-7.1

Other

component

: Signal ﬂow

MAIN

ZONE

OUT

: Signal ﬂow

Other component

Emitter

Remote control

sensor

IR Emitter

Mini plug

RDC-7.1

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

200mA MAX.

12V TRIGGER

100mA MAX.

12V TRIGGER

100mA MAX.

12V TRIGGER

100mA MAX.

12V TRIGGER

100mA MAX.

12V TRIGGER

Device A

Device B

Device C

Device D

Device E

Basic Operation of Remote Controller Buttons

The remote controller supplied with the RDC-7.1 is a multifunctional remote controller, so you can operate not only the

RDC-7.1 but also AV components connected to the apparatus and components placed in another room. The basic

operations are explained here. It is recommended that you read and understand this page before starting actual

operations. This explanation focuses on remote controller operations.

When you perform the procedures on the RDC-7.1, use

the input source buttons on the front panel.

To Operate the RDC-7.1 (AMP Mode)

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Enter

Dimmer

Display

Audio SEL L Night,

Re-EQ

Surround,

THX,

All CH ST,

Stereo,

Pure A,

Direct,

DSP

VOL /

Muting

Sleep

Main A/

Main B

Test Tone,

CH SEL,

Level –/+

On,

Standby

Setup/

Enter/

Return/

Cursor

///

RC-554M

RC-555M

Scroll

wheel

Press the scroll wheel.

When the remote controller is in AMP

mode, the following functions are

available:

On/Standby:

Press to set power on/standby.

Main A:

Used when driving the speaker that has

been set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

Main B:

Used when driving the speaker that has

been set to “Main B” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

Dimmer:

Used when changing brightness of the

display window.

Setup/Return/Enter/Cursor / / / ):

Used

when operating the setup menu.

Display:

Used when switching the display.

THX/Surround/Pure A/Direct/All CH ST/

Stereo/DSP / :

Used when switching the

listening mode.

Test Tone/CH SEL/Level–/+:

Used for the test

tone, or when temporarily changing the sound

volume level.

Audio SEL:

Used when switching the sound

signal.

Sleep:

Used when setting the sleep timer.

VOL :

Used when adjusting the sound

volume.

Muting:

Used to temporarily turn off the sound

immediately.

L Night:

Used when switching the dynamic range.

Re-EQ:

Used when applying the Re-EQ effect.

Indication on the lower

line changes to AMP.

To Select an Input Source

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Input

Scroll wheel

Press the [Input] button.

The [Input] button lights.

Roll the scroll wheel.

Indication on the

upper line changes.

Operations

Basic Operation of Remote Controller Buttons

—Continued

Before operating the connected component, follow the

instructions pages 124 through 133 to make appropriate

settings using the remote controller.

When you perform the procedures on the RDC-7.1,

press the [Zone 2] (or [Rec/Zone 3]), and press the input

source buttons.

Before performing the following procedure, complete

your macro settings (See page 137).

Use the [Custom] button “to enter the remote controller code for another apparatus to this remote controller,” “to make

this remote controller learn speciﬁed operations from the remote controller for another apparatus,” or “to make this

remote controller learn a series of operations with macro functions” according to the conﬁguration you are using. For

detailed information, see pages 136-142.

To Operate a Connected Component (Mode Switching)

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Mode

Scroll wheel

Press the [Mode] button.

The [Mode] button lights.

Roll the scroll wheel.

Indication on the lower line

changes to indicate the

selected component mode.

To Select a Source in Zone 2 or Zone 3

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Zone 2

Zone 3

Scroll wheel

Press the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.

The [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button lights.

Roll the scroll wheel.

Indication on the upper

line changes to indicate

the selected input.

To Perform a Macro Operation

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Scroll wheel

Press the [Macro] button.

The [Macro] button lights.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the macro’s

number, and then press the scroll wheel.

Customizing Your Remote Controller

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations

• Before you plug in the RDC-7.1, conﬁrm that all connections have been made properly.

• Turning on the power may cause a momentary power surge, which might interfere with other electrical equipment

on the same circuit, such as computers. If this happens, use a wall outlet on a different circuit.

• The RDC-7.1 is shipped with the main power (Power) switch in the on position ( ). When the power cord is

plugged in for the ﬁrst time, the RDC-7.1 will automatically enter the standby state and the [Standby] indicator will

light (same condition after step 2 below on the left column).

Note:

Any components connected via will also be turned

on when the remote controller’s [On] button is pressed.

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2 ()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3 ()

RED

O f f

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

Dimmer

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Master Volume

Standby/On

Power

Input source buttons

Standby indicator

To wall outlet

Turning on the Power

Plug the power cord into an AC

wall outlet.

Press the [Power] switch to set the

RDC-7.1 to standby state.

The [Standby] indicator will light up.

Press the [Standby/On] button to

turn on the RDC-7.1.

The display will light up and the

[Standby] indicator will turn off.

If you press the [Standby/On] button

again, the RDC-7.1 returns to the

standby state.

Power

O f f

Standby

Standby/On

Standby

Turn off

Operating on the RDC-7.1

Select an input source.

Press the input source button.

*You cannot listen to a source in main

room A, and to another source in main

room B.

Start playing the device selected.

When playing a picture device such as a

DVD player, you need to switch input to a

monitor such as a TV set.

Some picture-playing devices such as a

DVD-type game machine may also

require setting of sound output. Refer to

the manual of the device connected.

Adjust the volume level with the

[Master Volume] dial.

You can adjust the volume level in the

range from –

∞

, –81.5 dB to 18.0 dB

(when Relative is selected in the Volume

Setup sub-menu).

Hint:

The RDC-7.1 is a product for users to

enjoy home theater, so it is equipped

with a wide range of volume levels.

Please ﬁne tune the volume level

according to your preferences.

DVD Video 1 Video 2 Video 3

Video 4 Video 5 Video 6 Video 7

Tape 1 Tape 2 Tuner

Phono Net Audio

C D

Master Volume

Operations

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations

—Continued

Before you can use the remote controller, you must

perform steps 1 and 2 in the “Turning on the Power”

section and place the RDC-

7.1 in the standby state.

Turning on the Power from the

Remote Controller

Press the scroll wheel.

“AMP” appears on the remote control-

ler’s display. This is the mode for con-

trolling the RDC-7.1.

Press the [On] button to turn on

the RDC-7.1.

To set the RDC-7.1 to Standby, press the

[Standby] button.

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

VOL

Input

Main A Main B

Mode

Standby

RC-554M

RC-555M

Scroll wheel

Operating with Remote Controller

Press the button for the room

where you want to play your

device.

Main A:

Switches to operations in main

room A.

Main B:

Switches to operations in main

room B.

When Main A or Main B is selected, the

indicator on the front display of the

RDC-7.1 lights.

If the mode is already effective, you do not

need to press. If you press this button, the

mode becomes ineffective.

The speaker set in the Speaker/Output

Setup menu sounds in the room selected.

Roll the scroll wheel to select a

device to play.

Carry out this operation when neither the

[Mode] button nor the [Input] button

lights. If any button lights, press it to turn

it off.

Rolling the scroll wheel lights both

buttons, and switches the input source and

the mode at the same time.

Start playing the device selected.

When playing a picture device such as a

DVD player, you need to switch the input

to a monitor such as TV set.

Some picture-playing devices such as a

DVD-type game machine may also

require setting of sound output. Refer to

the manual of the device connected.

Adjust the volume level with the

[VOL ] button.

You can adjust the volume level in the

range from –

∞

, –81.5 dB to 18.0 dB

(Max) (when Relative is selected in the

Volume Setup sub-menu).

Hint:

The RDC-7.1 is a product for users to

enjoy home theater, so it is equipped with

a wide range of volume levels. Please ﬁne-

tune the volume level according to your

preferences.

Main A Main B

VOL

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations

—Continued

Listening with Headphones

To listen with headphones, plug a pair of headphones

with a standard stereo plug into the Phones jack on the

RDC-7.1 front panel.

• When you connect headphones, no sound will be

heard from the speakers.

• While the Dolby Headphone feature is active,

appears on the front display. Refer to pages 60, 61,

and 120.

Note:

The signal to the remote zone (Zone 2/3) will not be

affected whether or not headphones are connected.

Adjusting the Brightness of the Front Display

You can adjust the brightness of the front display of the

RDC-7.1 using the [Dimmer] button on the remote con-

troller or on the RDC-7.1 front panel (other than Euro-

pean models).

Temporarily Turning Off the Sound (remote

controller only)

Use the [Muting] button to temporarily turn off the

sound immediately.

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Muting

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Enter

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3()

RED

O f f

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

Dimmer

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Dimmer Phones

Muting

Dimmer

Scroll wheel

Phones

Exit

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Use the [Dimmer] button on the

RDC-7.1 to select: normal, dark,

very dark, and volume only.

On the remote controller, press the

scroll wheel, and then press the

[Dimmer] button.

Press the scroll wheel, and then

press the [Muting] button on the

remote controller.

When pressed, “Muting” is displayed on

the RDC-7.1. Press the [Muting] button

again to turn the sound back on.

Dimmer

RDC-7.1

Remote

controller

Muting

Remote

controller

Operations

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations

—Continued

Using the Sleep Timer (remote controller only)

With the sleep timer you can set the RDC-7.1 so that it

automatically turns off after a set period.

Temporarily Changing the Speaker Output

Levels (remote controller only)

To change the individual speaker volumes temporarily,

follow the procedure given below. Each channel can be

set between –12 and +12 decibels (between –15 and

+12 decibels for the subwoofer). Note that the speaker

volumes will return to the original settings when the

RDC-7.1 is put in the standby state.

Note:

You cannot select a speaker if it is set to “Not Used” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration Sub-menu of the Speaker/

Output Setup Menu.

Press the scroll wheel, and then

press the [Sleep] button repeat-

edly to select the required sleep

time.

You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10

minutes in 10 minute increments.

The [SLEEP] indicator appears on the

display when the sleep timer has been set,

as shown. The speciﬁed sleep time

appears on the display for about ﬁve

seconds, then the previous display

reappears.

Note:

If you are using the remote zone (Zone 2 or

3), it will turn off at the same time as the

main zone.

To cancel the sleep timer,

press the

[Sleep] button repeatedly until the

[SLEEP] indicator disappears.

To check the remaining sleep time,

press

the [Sleep] button. Note that if you press

the [Sleep] button while the sleep time is

being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep

time by 10 minutes.

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

CH SEL Level–

Level+

Sleep

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

Sleep

Remote

controller

Press the scroll wheel to enter the

AMP mode.

Press the [CH SEL] button and

select the desired speaker.

Press the [Level –] or [Level +] but-

ton to adjust the volume level.

CH SEL

Level

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations

—Continued

Switching the Display

While listening to or watching an input source, you can

display information regarding the type of source and sig-

nal being input.

When an input source other than FM or AM is selected:

*When the input signal is digital audio other than PCM

The program format is displayed. For example, the dis-

play “Dolby D: 3/2.1” shows that the format is Dolby

Digital with 5.1 discrete channels consisting of three

front channels (front left, front right, and center), two

surround channels (surround left and surround right),

and the low frequency effect (LFE) channel.

When the front channel number is 2, they are the front left

and front right; when it is 1, it is monaural. When the sur-

round channel number is 1, it is monaural; when it is 0,

there is no surround channel. When no LFE number is

given, there is no LFE channel. Also, if there is no program

format for the input signal, nothing will be displayed.

When the input signal is linear PCM

The sampling frequency is displayed. For example, the

display “PCM fs: 44.1k” shows that the signal is PCM

and that the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz.

Dialog norm

Dialogue Normalization (Dialog Norm) is a feature of

Dolby Digital. When playing back software that has

been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see

a brief message in the front panel display that reads Dia-

log Norm xdB (“x” being a numeric value). Dialogue

Normalization serves to let you know if the source

material has been recorded at a higher or lower level

than usual. For example, if you see the message “Dialog

Norm: +4” in the front panel display, to keep the overall

output level constant the output volume has been auto-

matically decreased by 4 dB. In other words, the source

material that you are listening to has been recorded 4 dB

louder than usual.

When FM or AM is selected as the input source:

Press the [Display] button on the

RDC-7.1.

On the remote controller, press the

scroll wheel, and then press the

[Display] button.

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Re-EQ

L Night

Input

Audio SEL

Display

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3()

RED

O f f

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

Dimmer

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Display

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

Display

RDC-7.1

Remote

controller

Display

Input

Program format*

Custom name

Listening mode

FM/AM +

Frequency

Listening

mode

Custom

name

Listening

mode

Preset

no.

Preset

no.

Operations

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations

—Continued

Changing the Audio Mode (remote controller

only)

The RDC-7.1 accepts analog, digital, i.LINK (AUDIO)

and multichannel signals for audio input. You can

choose the kind of signal to be played for a speciﬁc

device. For Zone 2, the RDC-7.1 accepts only analog

and digital signals for audio input.

Auto (XXX) (automatic detection):

With this setting,

the RDC-7.1 automatically detects whether the input

signal is digital or analog. When a digital signal is not

input, then the analog signal is played. This setting only

appears if a digital input is selected for the Digital Input

setting at Setup Menu

→

Input Setup Menu

→

Audio

Assign Sub-menu

→

Digital Audio (See page 99).

(XXX) displays the name of the assigned terminal.

Multich (Multichannel):

Select this setting to play back

the input from the component connected to the MULTI-

CH IN 1/2 port. This setting only appears if “1” or “2” is

selected for the Multichannel setting at Setup Menu

→

Input Setup Menu

→

Audio Assign Sub-menu

→

Multi-

channel (See page 98).

Analog:

Select this setting to playback the input from a

source component connected to analog audio input jacks.

With this setting, even if a digital signal is input from the

same component, only the analog signal will be output.

i.LINK:

Select this setting to play back the input from a

source component connected to the i.LINK (AUDIO) ter-

minal. With this setting, only the i.LINK signal will be

output. This settings is available when any device is

selected at Input Setup menu

→

Audio Assign Sub-menu

→

i.LINK.

Using the Re-EQ Function

This function corrects soundtracks with a strong treble

level to the home theater level. This correction should

be made when the treble sounds from the front speakers

are too strong.

Hint:

This can also be set on the menu with OSD. The listening

mode which the Re-EQ effect can be applied to has a

Re-EQ option in the Listening Mode Setup menu.

Using the Late Night Function

(only in Dolby Digital)

The difference between loud and quiet sounds is very

large in pictures produced for movie theaters, so you have

to raise the volume level to catch environmental sounds

and human conversations. Since the Late Night Function

is able to reduce the difference between loud and quiet

sounds, you can hear quiet sounds without raising the

entire volume level. This function is helpful when you

enjoy movies late at night by turning down sounds.

This function is released when putting the RDC-7.1 into

the standby status.

Hint:

This function can also be set on the menu with OSD

(See page 109).

Press the [Input] button, and then

roll the scroll wheel to select the

input source you want to set.

Press the scroll wheel and then

press the [Audio SEL] button.

Each time the button is pressed, the mode

changes from “Auto”

→

“Analog”

→

“Multich”

→

“i.LINK” and back to

“Auto.” The “Auto” audio mode is recom-

mended for normal circumstances.

Input

Audio

SEL

Press the scroll wheel, and then

press the [Re-EQ] button (repeat-

edly).

Press the scroll wheel, and then

press the [L Night] button (repeat-

edly).

Off:

Turns off the Late Night function.

Low:

Reduces the difference between

loud and quiet sounds.

High:

Further reduces the difference

between loud and quiet sounds.

The previous display comes back after a

while.

Notes:

• The Late Night function is effective

only for Dolby Digital sources.

• The Late Night function may be less

effective or have no effect depending

on the Dolby Digital source.

Re-EQ

L Night

Using the Listening Modes

Types of Listening Modes

Listening modes on the RDC-7.1 enable you to enjoy

movie theater or concert hall quality sounds in your

room. The RDC-7.1 provides the following listening

modes. Before playing a source in optimal sound, be

sure to complete the Speaker/Output Setup (See pages

92-94).

Direct

This mode allows you to enjoy pure sounds straight

from an original source. Every channel of the audio

input source will be output “as is” to respective chan-

nels.

Pure Audio

In addition to the Direct mode, playback of music more

faithful to the original sounds is enabled because the

display window is turned off to minimize noise sources

(the power supply to the video circuitry is also turned

off, so nothing is displayed on the screen).

Stereo

Sounds are output from the right and left front speakers,

and the subwoofer.

Mono

This mode is suitable for playing old movies recorded

in monaural sound, or for playing the right and left

channels separately on bilingual sources. This mode

also allows you to listen to multiplexed soundtracks on

DVDs and other sources.

Dolby Pro Logic II

This mode enables 5.1 channel playback of music and

movies recorded in 2 channels. You can select the Movie

mode, best designed for playing movies, the Music

mode, best designed for listening to music, and the

Game mode, best suited for enjoying games.

• PLII Movie

This mode can be used with VHS and DVD videos

with the mark, and certain television

programs.

• PLII Music

This mode can be used with stereo music CDs and

DVD recordings of live concerts.

• PLII Game

This mode can be used with game discs.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

This mode reproduces in 5.1-7.1 channels music CDs

and movies recorded in 2 channels. Together with

clearer sounds, you will hear more natural and smoother

surround effects than ever before. In addition to CDs

and movies, game sources are played with a dramatic

spatial presentation and with sound localization. And

this mode enables 7.1 channel playback of music and

movies recorded in 5.1 channels. You can select the

PLIIx Movie and PLIIx Music mode.

• PLIIx Movie

This is the best mode for viewing movies.

• PLIIx Music

This is the best mode for playing music.

• PLIIx Game

This is the best mode for enjoying games, providing

the best sense of signal movement.

Dolby Digital

This is a surround mode that will make you feel as if you are

sitting in a seat inside a theater or concert hall. This mode

can be used with DVDs and LDs with the mark.

Dolby VS (Dolby Virtual Speaker)

The dynamic surround sound effects speciﬁc to 5.1

channel speakers are reproduced through 2 speakers.

When combined with “Dolby Pro Logic II”/“DTS

NEO:6,” this mode provides 5.1 channel surround

music recorded in 2 channels on CD or MP3 through

only 2 speakers. This mode can also be applied to a sys-

tem equipped with more than 2 speakers.

If you are able to use only 2 speakers in a separate room

(Zone 2 or Zone 3) or main room B, this mode will let

you experience truly powerful sounds of a movie, CD or

game through the virtual surround effects. When you

use this mode with three or more speakers, the speakers

used for output will depend on the input source and

decoding mode.

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

This mode enables 6.1 channel playback of music or

movies recorded in 5.1 channels. Adding a surround

channel to the backside of 5.1 channel speakers to make

them 6.1 channel speakers will enhance space

expressions that should give you a real feel of moving

sounds such as 360-degree rotation or overhead ﬂying.

Since sounds on the surround back channel are divided

into the surround left and right channels, this mode also

enables conventional 5.1 channel playback. When

playing DVDs and LDs recorded in 5.1 channels with

the mark, Dolby Digital EX mode turns on, and

when playing other sources, Dolby EX turns on.

DTS

Sound data that would be of tremendous size if com-

pletely divided into 5.1 channels are compressed into

digital data with a status as close as possible to the orig-

inal sounds. Playing in this mode requires a DVD player

able to output DTS. This mode can be used with CDs,

DVDs and LDs with the mark.

DTS 96/24

This is a listening mode available with DTS 96/24. This

mode allows you to enjoy delicate sounds.

DTS-ES Discrete

This is a 6.1 channel surround system based on DTS

with a surround back channel added. Since all 6.1 chan-

nels including the added surround back channel are

recorded as completely independent digital data, a 3-D

feeling and a sense of moving sounds are reproduced

more clearly. This mode can be used with CDs, DVDs,

and LDs with the mark.

Operations

Using the Listening Modes

—Continued

DTS-ES Matrix

This mode plays in 6.1 channels the music and movies

recorded in DTS-ES. Sources recorded in DTS-ES

include data for the surround back channel, and each

channel is reproduced in 6.1 channels. This mode can

be used with CDs, DVDs, and LDs with the

mark.

DTS NEO:6

This mode enables 6.1 channel playback of music and

movies recorded in 2 channels. A broad frequency band

is allocated to each channel, and every channel is kept

very independent. This mode can be set to the Cinema

mode, best designed for playing movies, and the Music

mode, best designed for listening to music.

The sources recorded in 5.1 channels are played in NEO:6.

• NEO:6 Cinema

Surround effects full of moving sound feelings are

reproduced. This mode is suitable for 2 channel

recorded VHS videos, DVD videos, and television

programs.

• NEO:6 Music

Since it uses a surround channel, this mode creates a

natural sound ﬁeld, which cannot be expected from

ordinary 2 channel output. This mode is suitable for

playing CDs recorded in 2 channels.

AAC

Digital data compressed through the MPEG-2 AAC sys-

tem reproduces surround sounds of 5.1 channels at

maximum. This mode can be used for playing AAC

sources such as a BS-digital-broadcasted program.

Multiplex

This mode is used for listening to multiplex broadcasts.

THX

This mode produces the maximum effects on a THX-

compliant speaker system.

• THX Cinema

This is a 5.1 channel THX mode, designed for view-

ing theatrical ﬁlms recorded and edited on the

assumption that they will be played in a sizable place

like a movie theater. The audio output for the sur-

round back channels depends on the input source and

decoding mode.

• THX Ultra2 Cinema

This is the THX Ultra 2 mode. This mode enables 7.1

channel playback of music and movies recorded in

5.1 channels. It analyzes surround factors to be repro-

duced, and distributes the factors to the surround back

to optimize the atmosphere and the sense of orienta-

tion. This function reinforces the horizontal and back-

ward extension, and the sound location.

• THX Music Mode

This is the THX Ultra 2 mode designed for playing

music sources. It enables 7.1 channel playback of 5.1

channel recorded sources.

• THX Games Mode

This is the THX Ultra 2 mode designed for playing

game sources.

• THX Surround EX

“THX Surround EX” - Dolby Digital Surround EX is

a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the

THX Ltd.

In a movie theater, ﬁlm soundtracks that have been

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology

are able to reproduce an extra surround back channel

which has been added during the mixing of the pro-

gram. A list of Surround EX encoded movies can be

found on www.Dolby.com.

• Multichannel

This is a listening mode available with analog multi-

channel connection.

• i.LINK: DVD-Audio

This is a listening mode used for playing DVD-Audio

format sources during i.LINK (AUDIO) connection.

• i.LINK: SACD

This is a listening mode used for playing Super Audio

CD format sources during i.LINK (AUDIO)

connection.

IntegraRESEARCH’s Proprietary Listening

Mode (DSP)

All Ch Stereo

This mode is useful for playing music as BGM. Stereo

sounds are provided by all speakers, so you can enjoy a

powerful sound ﬁeld.

Full Mono

Monaural sounds are provided by all speakers. You can

listen to the same tone of music wherever you are.

Mono Movie

This mode is suitable for playing old movies recorded

with monaural sound. The center channel outputs straight

sounds, while other speakers provide center sounds with

adequate echo effects. Despite monaural sound, you can

enjoy the feeling of being in a movie theater.

Enhance

This mode is suitable for playing music, and watching

sports programs on television. Environmental sounds

are move naturally to the surround and surround back

speakers, so more dynamic sounds are reproduced.

Orchestra

This mode is suitable for playing classical music and

operas. The surround effects are reinforced to extend the

sound image throughout the listening room. You can

enjoy the natural touch of music as if you are sitting in a

large concert hall.

Unplugged

This mode is suitable for listening to acoustic sounds,

vocals and jazz music. Because it focuses on the front

sound image, this mode creates an image of the sound

ﬁeld that makes you feel as if you are listening to music

in front of a stage.

Studio-Mix

This mode is suitable for rock‘n’ roll and popular

music. The image of powerful sounds is reproduced as

sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in a live

house.

Using the Listening Modes

—Continued

TV Logic

This mode is suitable for television programs broadcast

from studios. You may feel as if you are sitting in a tele-

vision studio. All of the surround sounds are enhanced,

and conversations are output clearly.

Listening Modes for Listeners Using

Headphones

Dolby Headphone

This mode makes headphones reproduce dynamic sur-

round sound effects like 5.1 channel speakers. The lis-

tening mode used before putting on headphones is

applied to the headphones. However, the following lis-

tening modes will be decoded as follows:

• The Dolby VS or Stereo mode sources will be

decoded in the Dolby Headphone mode.

• The source decoded in the 7.1ch surround format will

be decoded in the 5.1ch surround format.

• The DTS 96/24 mode source will be decoded in the

DTS format.

Listening modes when the Dolby Headphone is set to

“Off”:

Direct

When the listening mode was Direct before putting on

headphones, this mode is applied. Effects are the same

as the Direct mode indicated previously.

Pure Audio

When the listening mode was Pure Audio before putting

on headphones, this mode is applied. Effects are the

same as the Pure Audio indicated previously.

Mono

When the listening mode was Mono, Mono Movie or

Full Mono before putting on headphones, this mode is

applied. Effects are the same as the Mono mode indi-

cated previously.

This mode is also applied when you listen to the monau-

ral source in the Dolby VS listening mode before put-

ting on headphones.

Stereo

When the listening mode was other than Direct, Pure

Audio, Mono, Mono Movie or Full Mono before put-

ting on headphones, this mode is applied. Effects are the

same as the Stereo mode indicated previously.

Multiplex

When the listening mode was Multiplex before putting

on headphones, this mode is applied.

Operations

Using the Listening Modes

—Continued

The RDC-7.1 provides various listening modes.

Note:

The available modes depend on the input signal you

selected.

Operating on the RDC-

7.1

Operating with the Remote Controller

Tip:

A table listed later in this manual shows which listening

mode can be used with which input signal format. See

page 143.

Selecting the Listening Mode

Press the input source button.

Start playback on the device you selected

for input.

Use the [ ] DSP [ ] buttons to select a

listening mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select a device for play-

back.

Perform this operation when neither the [Mode]

button nor the [Input] button lights. If any button

lights, press it to turn it off.

Rolling the scroll wheel lights both buttons, and

switches the input source and the mode at the

same time.

Start playback on the device you selected

for input.

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3()

RED

O f f

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

Dimmer

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Mode

Surround

THX

Stereo

All CH ST

Direct

Pure A DSP

Input

DSP

Input source buttons

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

Press the scroll wheel, and then press the

listening mode button you want to select.

Pure A button:

To switch the listening mode to

“Pure Audio.” When you select “PURE AUDIO,”

the video signal is interrupted (resulting in a

blacked-out screen), and the [Pure Audio] indica-

tor lights up.

Direct button:

To switch the listening mode to

“Direct.”

Stereo button:

To switch the listening mode to

“Stereo.”

Surround button:

To switch the listening mode

to the surround mode.

• When 5 channel signals are input, every time

you press the button, the listening mode

changes “DolbyEX”

→

“PLIIx Movie

(Default)”

→

“PLIIx Music”

→

“NEO:6”

→

“Off”

→

“DolbyEX,” and so on.

• When 2 channel signals are input, every time

you press the button, the listening mode

changes “PLIIx Movie (Default)”

→

“PLIIx

Music”

→

“PLIIx Game”

→

“NEO:6 Cinema”

→

“NEO:6 Music”

→

“PLIIx Movie

(Default),” and so on.

THX button:

To switch the listening mode to

“THX.”

• When Dolby Digital multichannel (*/2) signals

are input, you can switch to any of the

following decode modes. Every time you press

the button, the listening mode changes “THX

Cinema”

→

“SurroundEX”

→

“Ultra2 Cinema

(Default)”

→

“MusicMode”

→

“Games Mode”

→

“THX Cinema,” and so on (See page 115).

DSP/DSP

buttons:

Every time you press

the buttons, you can switch to any of the listening

modes according to the input signals.

ALL ST button:

To switch the listening mode to

“All Ch Stereo.”

[ ]/[ ] cursor buttons:

• When AAC’s multiplex sound signals are

input, the main-sound and sub-sound are

switched. Every time you press the [ ]/[ ]

buttons, the mode changes “Main”

→

“Sub”

→

“Main + Sub”

→

“Main,” and so on.

• When using the headphones, you can use the

[ ]/[ ] buttons to switch on/off the Dolby

Headphone listening mode.

Listening to Radio Broadcasts

This feature requires the tuner terminal board [K] to be inserted in the RDC-7.1.

One of the features of the RDC-7.1 that is most frequently

used is its ability to play FM and AM broadcast radio

stations. The RDC-7.1 provides a number of listening

modes perfect for listening to the radio and getting the

most out of your audio system. Also, by presetting radio

stations that you listen to frequently, you can select them

easily by pressing the [CH/Disc +/–] button on the remote

controller.

Setting the AM Tuning Interval

For the Asian or Australian models, you have to adjust the

“AM Frequency Step” setting according to your area.

Use the Setup menu to adjust the “AM Frequency Step”

setting.

To perform this setting, go to “Hardware Setup”

→

“AM

Frequency Setup”

→

“Frequency Step,” and select “9 kHz”

or “10 kHz.” For details on this setting, see page 91.

Tuning into a Radio Station Automatically

(automatic tuning)

When the FM stereo broadcast contains much noise:

Press the [Tuning Mode] button to switch to the manual

tuning mode. The “AUTO” indication disappears and the

tuner turns into the monaural mode. In the monaural

mode, the noise will be reduced and the broadcast be

easier to hear.

Tuning into a Radio Station Manually

(manual tuning)

• The tuner frequency changes in 200 kHz (50 kHz)

increments for FM and 10 kHz (or 9 kHz) increments

for AM.

• When you tune into an FM station manually, the tuner

turns into monaural mode. If you want to listen to the

FM station in stereo, press the [Tuning Mode] button.

Specifying Radio Stations by Frequency

To select a radio station by

entering its frequency, press

the remote controller’s [Direct

Tuning] button, and then use

the number buttons to enter

the frequency.

Using the Tuner

Tuning into a Radio Station

Press the [Tuner] input source

button.

Each time you press the [Tuner] button,

the input source changes between AM

and FM.

Press the [Tuning Mode] button to

turn on the “AUTO” indication.

Press the Tuning [ ] or [ ] button

once.

The tuner stops automatically where it

tunes into a station.

When you tune into a radio station,

TUNED

indicator appears in the

display. If you tune into an FM station in

stereo, then “FM STEREO” appears.

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3()

RED

O f f

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

Dimmer

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Tuning Mode

Tuner

Tuning

Tuner

Clear

Tuning Mode Memory

Tuning

Press the [Tuner] input source

button.

Each time you press the [Tuner] button,

the input source changes between AM

and FM.

Press the [Tuning Mode] button to

turn off the “AUTO” indication.

Continue to press the Tuning

[ ] or [ ] button.

When the tuner comes near the frequency

you want to listen to, release the button.

Then press the Tuning [ ] or [ ] button

repeatedly to adjust the frequency in

frequency steps.

Band Frequency

Tuner

Clear

Tuning Mode Memory

Tuning

Direct Tuning

Clear

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

@.-'/

---

10 0

123

456

789

Remote controller

Operations

Listening to Radio Broadcasts

—Continued

Presetting a Radio Station

Up to 40 stations can be stored in memory as preset radio

stations.

Selecting a Preset Radio Station

When using the RDC-7.1:

When using the remote controller:

Erasing a Preset Radio Station

Tune into the radio station you

desire (See “Tuning Into a Radio

Station”).

Press the [Memory] button on the

front panel.

Using the Preset [ ] and [ ]

buttons, select a preset number

(from 1 to 40) to assign the station.

The “MEMORY” indicator blinks for 5

seconds. Complete the procedure while

the “MEMORY” indicator blinks. If the

“MEMORY” indicator disappears before

completing the procedure, go back to step

2 and repeat the procedure again.

Press the [Memory] button to

ﬁnalize the procedure.

You can enter text names for any of the

preset radio stations (See page 101).

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3()

RED

O f f

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

Dimmer

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Memory

Tuner

Tuning Mode

Preset

Clear

Tuning Mode Memory Flashes

Preset

Clear

Tuning Mode Memory

Lights

Press [Tuner] input source button

on the RDC-7.1.

Using the Preset [ ] and [ ]

buttons, select the number of the

desired preset station.

Press the [Input] button, and then

use the scroll wheel to select

TUNER.

To switch to FM or AM, press the scroll

wheel.

Use the [CH/Disc +/–] button to

select the presets.

Selecting Presets by Number

To select a preset by number, use the

remote controller’s number buttons. For

example, to select preset #7, press [7]. To

select preset #12, press [1] then [2].

Press the [Tuner] input source

button and use the Preset [ ] and

[ ] buttons to select the preset

radio station that you want to

erase (See above).

Press and hold the [Memory]

button and then press the [Tuning

Mode] button.

The selected preset station is erased.

Tuner

Preset

Input

Disc

Tuner

Preset

Clear

Tuning Mode Memory

Listening to RDS Broadcasts (European models only)

RDS reception is available only on the European model

and only in areas where RDS broadcasts are available.

What is RDS?

RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a type of FM

broadcasting. RDS was developed within the European

Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available in most

European countries. Many FM broadcasting stations

now transmit the RDS signals, which provide the addi-

tional information required. RDS provides you with var-

ious services so that you can choose a station that

broadcasts your favorite categories of music, news, or

other information.

There are three main classiﬁcations of RDS broadcasts.

Though they can be tuned into by using the Tuning but-

tons as normal stations, RDS broadcasts allow you to

scan for stations of the type and classiﬁcation for which

you are looking. This makes it much easier for you to

ﬁnd the station you want (See “Performing a PTY Scan”

and “Performing a TP Scan” on page 65). The three main

classiﬁcations are explained below.

RT: Radio Text

When an RDS station broadcasting RT information is

selected, the text information received from the station is

displayed.

PTY: Program Type

When an RDS station broadcasting PTY information is

selected, the station type (classiﬁcation) is displayed.

TP: Trafﬁc Program

When an RDS station broadcasting TP information is

selected, trafﬁc information will be broadcast periodi-

cally.

Notes:

• In some cases, the characters displayed on the display

of the RDC-7.1 may not be exactly the same as the

ones broadcast by the radio station. Also, unusual

characters may appear on the display if the RDC-7.1

receives characters that cannot be displayed correctly.

This is not a malfunction.

• When an RDS station broadcasting PS information is

selected, the name of the station is displayed instead

of the frequency.

The text given in parentheses is what is actually dis-

played on the RDC-7.1.

None (NONE):

No program type.

News reports (NEWS):

Reports on current events and happenings.

Current affairs (AFFAIRS):

Topical reporting of current affairs, often with a wider

range of topics than news reports.

Information (INFO):

General information such as weather forecasts, con-

sumer affairs, medical help, etc.

Sports (SPORT):

Live sports action, sports news, and interviews.

Education (EDUCATE):

Formal educational programs.

Drama (DRAMA):

Radio plays and serials.

Culture (CULTURE):

Cultural programs (including religious affairs).

Science and technology (SCIENCE):

Programs about the natural sciences and technology.

Varied (VARIED):

Speech-based programs not covered by the above cate-

gories (e.g., quizzes, panel games, and comedy).

Pop music (POP M):

Popular commercial music, usually from past or present

sales charts (e.g., Top 40).

Rock music (ROCK M):

Popular music with an alternative appeal, often not

appearing on sales charts.

Middle of the road music (M.O.R. M):

Easy listening music (as opposed to Pop, Rock, or Clas-

sical).

Light classics (LIGHT M):

Classical music for general rather than specialist appre-

ciation.

Serious classics (CLASSICS):

Performances of major orchestral works, symphonies,

chamber music, etc. (including Grand Opera).

Other music (OTHER M):

Music styles not covered by the above categories (e.g.,

Jazz, Rhythm & Blues, Folk, Country, and Reggae).

• Alarm (ALARM):

When an RDS station is making an emergency broad-

cast, this ALARM will ﬂash on the display.

Listening to RDS Broadcasts PTY Program Types in Europe

Operations

Listening to RDS Broadcasts (European models only)

—Continued

If the station you are currently tuned into is broadcasting

RT signals, they will be displayed in the front display on

the RDC-7.1. If the station does not, this function will be

ignored.

• If the current station you are listening to is not an RDS

station, only the frequency of the station will appear.

• If “Waiting” appears on the display, more time is

required to receive the RT information. When the

information is received, the characters will scroll

across the front display.

• If “No Text Data” appears on the display, RT informa-

tion is not available.

• The display shows the frequency for 3 seconds and

returns to program service name.

Displaying Radio Text (RT)

To display the radio text, press the

[RT/PTY/TP] button once.

Performing a PTY Scan

Press the [Tuner] input source

button and select the FM input

source.

Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button

twice.

The current program type appears on the

display.

Using the [

]

and [

] cursor

buttons, select the PTY program

type you desire.

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3()

RED

O f f

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

RT/PTY/TP

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Tuner

RT/PTY/TP Enter

RT/PTY/TP

Tuner

RT/PTY/TP

Press the [Enter] button dial.

The RDC-7.1 will scan until it reaches a

station of the program type you selected.

It will then stop brieﬂy at that station

before continuing on until it reaches the

next station. Pressing the [Enter] button

dial stops the PTY scan at that point. If

you press the [RT/PTY/TP] while

“NONE” is displayed, “PTY ?” will

appear. In this case, return to step 3.

Press the [Enter] button dial when

it reaches the station that you want

to listen to.

“Not Found” will appear when no RDS

signal is being received from the station.

Performing a TP Scan

Press the [Tuner] input source

button.

Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button

three times.

“[TP]” will appear if the current station is

broadcasting TP signals. This station will

periodically broadcast trafﬁc information.

To ﬁnd a different station, proceed to the

next step. Also, if “TP” is displayed,

proceed to the next step.

Press the [Enter] button.

The RDC-7.1 will scan until it reaches a

station broadcasting trafﬁc information. If

“Not Found” appears on the display, a TP

station cannot be located.

Enter

Tuner

RT/PTY/TP

Enter

Enjoying Multichannel Playback

The multichannel playback feature requires the multichannel terminal board [E] to be inserted in the RDC-7.1.

The RDC-7.1 can be connected to two devices, such as

a DVD player, that deal with multichannel sounds (5.1-

7.1 channels).

To use multichannel connections, you need to specify

settings on the Input Setup menu. In addition, you can

set listening modes as you prefer. Enjoy multichannel

playback in the main room.

Use three or four audio connection cables or a multi-

channel connection cable to connect the multichannel

output jack on the connected device to the MULTI-CH

IN jack on the RDC-7.1.

If the multichannel option board that contains two

multichannel terminal sets is installed, use the same

procedure as described above for making connection.

Specify the input source type. At default, DVD is “1,”

CD is “2,” and others are “No.”

How to Connect

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/EBU

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

A B

FRONT

SUB

SURR

BACK

CENTER

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

How to Set Up

Press the [Input] button, and then roll the

scroll wheel to select the input source to

be set.

Press the scroll wheel, and then press the

[Setup] button to display the Main menu.

Press the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Input

Setup,” and then press the [Enter] button.

Press the [ /[ ] buttons to select “Audio

Assign,” and then press the [Enter] but-

ton.

Press the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select

“Multichannel,” and then select a setting

with the [ ]/[ ] buttons.

Select “1” when connected to MULTI-CH

IN 1, or “2” when connected to MULTI-CH

IN 2.

*MULTI-CH IN 2 can be selected when your

multichannel option board contains two

multichannel terminal sets.

Press the [Setup] button.

Setting is completed, and the menu screen disap-

pears.

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

V VOL

Rec

10 0

Clear

789

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Enter

Input

Setup

Enter

///

Scroll

wheel

Operations

Enjoying Multichannel Playback

—Continued

You can also set the listening mode in advance for mul-

tichannel playback (Listening Mode Preset). To do so,

select “Input Setup”

→

“Listening Mode Preset”

→

“Multichannel” on the Setup menu to choose the pre-

ferred mode. This defaults to “Multichannel.”

See page 59 for details of the listening mode, and page

100 for the listening mode preset.

To conﬁgure the listening mode settings including

audio effect and playback options:

You can specify detailed settings for the decode mode

and the speaker environment for multichannel playback

(Listening Mode Setup). See page 106 for details.

Hint:

The volume level of each speaker for multichannel

sounds is different from the calibration level to be set

with the test sound described on page 94. Adjustment

made here is not reﬂected in playing other than the mul-

tichannel playback.

Playing Back in Multichannel Sound

Press the [Input] button, and then roll the

scroll wheel to select the input source to

be set.

Press the scroll wheel, and then press

(repeatedly) the [Audio SEL] button to

select “Multich.”

Start playing.

Adjust the volume level with the [VOL ]

buttons.

You can also adjust the volume level in the range

from –

∞

, –81.5 dB to 18.0 dB (when Relative is

set for Volume Setup).

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Input

Audio SEL

VOL /

RC-554M

RC-555M

Scroll wheel

Adjusting the Volume Level of

Speakers for Multichannel Playback

Press the scroll wheel, and then press the

[CH SEL] button to select a speaker

whose volume level you want to adjust.

Speakers set by the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-

menu on the Speaker/Output Setup menu are dis-

played on a one-by-one basis.

Press the [Level –/+] button to adjust the

volume level.

You can adjust in the range from –12 dB to

+12 dB. The subwoofer can be adjusted in the

range from –15 dB to +12 dB.

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

Display

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

VOL

Disc

CH SEL Level –/+

RC-554M

RC-555M

Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone

(Zone 2/3)

You can connect speakers and ampliﬁers for the remote

zone, and enjoy different sources in a remote zone

(Zone 2 or Zone 3).

There are two ways to enjoy in a remote zone:

When Connecting the Pre-main Ampliﬁer or

Receiver (Zone 2 or Zone 3)

• You can enjoy a different source in a remote zone while

a 7.1 channel source is being played in the main room.

• Adjust the volume level on the pre-main ampliﬁer or

receiver in the remote zone.

Connecting and Setup

VIDEO

OUT

Receiver/

Pre-main ampliﬁer

Zone 2/Zone3

TV RDC-7.1

Main Room

Power amp

Connect the pre-main ampliﬁer or

receiver for Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the

RDC-7.1.

Connect to any of the following terminals:

• AUDIO OUT 1-5

Default:

Analog 4 (AUDIO OUT 4): Zone 2 Out

Analog 5 (AUDIO OUT 5): Zone 3 Out

• DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2

• DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2

Connect the speakers for Zone 2 or Zone

3 to the pre-main ampliﬁer or receiver.

Connect the video component for Zone 2

or Zone 3 to any of the composite VIDEO

OUT 1-4 terminals.

Set the Setup menu.

1. On the Setup menu (See page 95), select

“Speaker/Output Setup”

→

“Audio Output

Assign,” and set the terminal to which the

component is connected to “Zone 2 Out” or

“Zone 3 Out.”

2. Then, set “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” in

the Audio Output Assign sub-menu to

“Line Out (ﬁxed).”

3. Similarly, select “Speaker/Output Setup”

→

“Video Output Assign,” and set the terminal

to which the component is connected to

“Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out.”

4. Press the [Setup] button to close the menu.

Operations

Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone (Zone 2/3)

—Continued

When Connecting the Power Ampliﬁer (Zone 2

or Zone 3)

• You can enjoy a different source in a remote zone

while a 7.1 channel source is being played in the

main room.

• Adjust the volume level on the RDC-7.1 (not on the

power ampliﬁer).

• The sleep timer in the main room also works in Zone

2 and Zone 3. To make the sleep timer effective only

in Zone 2 or Zone 3, set the sleep timer on the

RDC-7.1 in the main room, and then put it into the

standby status.

• Sounds and pictures that can be output to Zone 2 and

Zone 3 are as follows:

*1 Only PCM output

*2 Possible for 2 channel downmix signal.

*3 In the case of COMPONENT VIDEO IN, possible if

the HDMI slot is inserted.

Columns covered by “ \ ” indicate that no setting related

to the column is speciﬁed for Zone 2 Out or Zone 3 Out

in “Audio Output Assign” or “Video Output Assign.”

Connect the power ampliﬁer for Zone 2 or

Zone 3 to the RDC-7.1.

Connect to any of the following terminals:

• AUDIO OUT 1-5

• DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2

• DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2

Connect the speakers for Zone 2 or Zone

3 to the power ampliﬁer.

Connect the video component for Zone 2

or Zone 3 to any of the composite VIDEO

OUT 1-4 terminals.

VIDEO

OUT

Zone 2/Zone3

TV RDC-7.1

Main Room

poweramp

Power amp

Set the Setup menu.

1. On the Setup menu (See page 95), select

“Speaker/Output Setup”

→

“Audio Output

Assign,” and set the terminal to which the

component is connected to “Zone 2 Out” or

“Zone 3 Out.”

2. Then, set “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” in

the Audio Output Assign sub-menu to “Pre

Out (variable).”

3. Similarly, select “Speaker/Output Setup”

→

“Video Output Assign,” and set the terminal

to which the component is connected to

“Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out.”

4. Press the [Setup] button to close the menu.

Enjoying Movies and Music in a

Remote Zone

From Input

Terminal

ZONE

REC/

ZONE

To Output Terminal

ETHERNET,

PH,

AUDIO IN 1-9

✔✔

AUDIO OUT 1-5

DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2

DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2

DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL 1-6,

DIGITAL IN

COAXIAL 1-6

✔

AUDIO OUT 1-5

✔✔

DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2

✔✔

DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2

VIDEO IN 1-6,

S VIDEO IN 1-

6, COMPO-

NENT VIDEO

IN 1-6

✔

VIDEO OUT 1-4

S VIDEO OUT 1-4

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Audio Input

Video Input

Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone (Zone 2/3)

—Continued

Operating with the Remote Controller

When operating with the remote controller, how to

operate depends on the location of Zone 2 or Zone 3, or

the distance from the RDC-7.1.

• Point the remote controller at the infrared receiver on

the RDC-7.1, and then operate the controller.

• Install a remote controller sensor in Zone 2 or Zone 3

through an IR connection (See pages 46-49).

• Switch the Transmission Signal Format to RF (Radio

Frequency) (depending on the destination) (See page

141).

Operating on the RDC-7.1

Power on the devices in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Press the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button, and then

the [On] button.

Select a source.

Rotate the scroll wheel to select a source while

the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button is lighted (if the

button is not lighted, press the [Zone 2] or [Zone

3] button to light it).

• When you have selected the tuner, you can

choose a preset channel with the [CH Disc

+/–] button.

Adjust the volume level.

Press the [Zone 2] (or [Zone 3]) button, and

within 5 seconds, press the [Level –/+] button to

adjust the volume level.

Notes:

• When the pre-main ampliﬁer or receiver is

connected, the volume level should be adjusted

at the connected component side.

• When not using Zone 2 or Zone 3, press the

[Zone 2] (or [Zone 3]) button, and then press

the [Standby] button.

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

RC-554M

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

CH Disc +/–

On, Standby

Level –/+

Zone 2

Zone 3

Turn on the power supply to the RDC-7.1, and

then select a source for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

For Zone 2

Press the [Zone 2] button, and then

select the source with the input source buttons.

The indicator above the selected input source

button will light green.

For Zone 3

Press the [Rec/Zone 3] button, and

then, select the source with the input source but-

tons. The indicator above the selected input

source button will light red.

When you press the [Zone 2] or [Rec/Zone 3]

button, the [Standby] indicator on the RDC-7.1

blinks for three seconds, so perform operations

while it is blinking.

When the same input source is selected for Zone

2 and Zone 3, it will light orange.

To switch the source for Zone 2 (or Zone 3) and

the main room simultaneously:

Repeatedly press the [Zone 2] (or [Rec/Zone 3])

button to display “Z2Sel:SOURCE,” and then

select the source.

Adjust the volume level.

For Zone 2

Press the [Zone 2] button, and then

adjust with the [Master Volume] dial.

For Zone 3

Press the [Rec/Zone 3] button, and

then adjust with the [Master Volume] dial.

Notes:

• When a pre-main ampliﬁer or receiver is con-

nected to the RDC-7.1, the volume level

should be adjusted at the connected component

side.

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3()

RED

O f f

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

Dimmer

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Zone 2

Master Volume

Standby/On

Off

Rec/Zone 3

Input source buttons and

indicators

Standby indicator

Operations

Recording a Source

The RDC-7.1 can not only record the playing source but

can also record a source while playing another source.

You can also combine a video and audio to create a new

source.

Signals that can be output to a video/audio recording

device vary with the type of jack connected. Check the

following conditions before starting recording:

Audio

• Signals (analog) from the ETHERNET, PH, or

AUDIO IN jacks are output only to the AUDIO OUT

jacks. Music signals of MP3, WMA, and WAVE to be

played with Net Audio are also output only to analog

audio output jacks.

• No signal is output from the MULTI-CH IN jacks.

• The signal supplied through the HDMI IN terminal

will be always present on the HDMI OUT terminal.

• Signals from the DIGITAL IN OPTICAL or COAX-

IAL jacks are output to the DIGITAL OUT OPTI-

CAL or COAXIAL jacks. PCM signals are converted

into analog signals, and also output to the AUDIO

OUT jacks.

Video

• Video signals from the VIDEO IN, S VIDEO IN, or

COMPONENT VIDEO IN jack are output only to the

VIDEO OUT jacks.

• When not using Zone 2 or Zone 3, press the

[Zone 2] (or [Rec/Zone 3]) button, and then

press the [Standby/On] button. Or press the

[Zone 2] (or [Rec/Zone 3]) button, and then

press the [Off] button. In the case of Zone 2,

the green indicator above the input source

button is turned off, and in the case of Zone 3,

the red indicator is turned off.

• When operating in the main room, be sure to

conﬁrm that the [Standby] indicator is not

blinking, and then start operations. When not

using in the main room, press the [Standby/

On] button. If the RDC-7.1 is in the standby

status, the power supply to Zone 2 and Zone 3

is not switched off.

Recording a Source

—Continued

Some steps can also be operated on the remote control-

ler, but described here are operations on the RDC-7.1.

Notes:

• No surround effects can be recorded.

• No DVD or any sources whose copyright is protected

can be recorded.

• There are some restrictions on recording of digital

audio/video signals. Refer to the manual of your

recording component.

• If recorded as analog signals, DTS signals are

recorded as noise, so never record signals from a

DTS-compatible CD or LD.

Recording music or a movie you are currently playing.

Operate on the RDC-7.1 in the main room.

You can record an audio source or a video on a compo-

nent while playing another source on another compo-

nent. For example, you can record a CD while watching

a DVD. Operate this function the RDC-7.1 in the main

room.

Recording Audio/Video While Playing

Turn on the power supply to the RDC-7.1.

Check the connection to your recording

component.

An audio recorder should be connected to the

AUDIO OUT or DIGITAL OUT jacks, and a

video recorder to the VIDEO OUT jacks.

Check settings for a recorder connected.

1. On the Setup menu (See page 95), select

“Speaker/Output Setup”

→

“Audio Output

Assign,” and specify “Rec Out” as the setting

for the jack to which your audio recording

component is connected.

2. Similarly, select “Speaker/Output Setup”

→

“Video Output Assign,” and specify “Video

XX Rec Out” as the setting for the jack to

which your video recording component is

connected.

3. Press the [Setup] button to close the menu.

Hint:

Since Zone 3 Out and Rec Out use the same cir-

cuitry, audio recording is disabled if Zone 3 Out

is speciﬁed. Audio/video recording is also dis-

abled on the same component as that for playing.

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3()

RED

O f f

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

Dimmer

AV Controller RDC-7.1

SetupRec/Zone 3 ///

Standby indicator

Input source buttons

and indicators

Press the input source button to select

the component for audio/video recording

(player side).

Press the [Rec/Zone 3] button, and press it

again within 3 seconds.

The “RecSel:SOURCE” is indicated in the dis-

play window, and the indicator above the selected

input source button lights in red.

Audio/video recording is enabled on the compo-

nent for which “Rec Out” was speciﬁed in step 3.

Prepare the component for audio/video

recording (recorder side).

• Put the component for audio/video recording

into the recording standby status.

• You should adjust the recording level on the

recording component.

• For how to record, refer to the manual of the

recording component.

Start audio/video recording.

Play the component selected in step 4.

• Switching the source during audio/video

recording will record the source newly

selected.

• If you select FM (or AM) with the [Tuner]

input source button when the recording source

is set to AM (or FM), the output for the record-

ing source also changes to AM (or FM).

Recording Audio/Video on a

Component While Playing Another

Turn on the power supply to the RDC-7.1 in

MAIN A or MAIN B mode.

Proceeding to the next step in the Standby status

makes the Zone 3 mode effective, so be sure to

turn on the power source.

Check connections and settings to the

recording component.

Refer to steps 2 and 3 in “Recording Audio/

Video While Playing” in the previous section.

Operations

Recording a Source

—Continued

You can add audio signals from a source to a video of

another source to make your own custom video record-

ings. Below is an example of recording audio signals

from a CD player connected to the DIGITAL IN OPTI-

CAL 2 jack and the video from a video camera con-

nected to VIDEO IN 3 onto a video cassette tape on a

VCR connected to VIDEO OUT 2.

Operate this function in the main room.

Press the [Rec/Zone3] button, and within

3 seconds, select the source to be

recorded with input source buttons.

Pressing the [Rec/Zone 3] button makes the

[Standby] indicator blink for 3 seconds. Select

the target sources while the indicator is blinking.

The name of the source to be recorded is indi-

cated in the display window. Audio/video record-

ing is enabled on the component for which “Rec

Out” was speciﬁed in step 2.

Prepare the component for audio/video

recording (recorder side).

Start audio/video recording.

You cannot listen to a broadcast from one station

while recording a broadcast from another station.

Recording the Video from one Source

and the Audio from Another Source

Turn on the power supply to the RDC-7.1

in MAIN A or MAIN B mode.

Check connections and settings to the

recording component.

Refer to steps 2 and 3 in “Recording Audio/Video

While Playing” on page 72.

Press the [CD] input source button.

Press the [Setup] button to display Main

menu, and use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to

select “Input Setup.”

After selecting “Input Setup,” press the [Enter]

button.

To carry out steps 3-6 on the remote controller, fol-

low the procedures described on page 90.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Video

Assign,” and press the [Enter] button.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Com-

posite Video,” and set it to “3” with the

[ ]/[ ] buttons.

After setting to “3,” press the [Setup] button.

Insert a CD in the CD player and insert a

tape in the video camera connected to the

VIDEO IN 3 jacks.

Insert a tape in the VCR connected to the

VIDEO OUT 2 jacks.

Press the [Rec/Zone 3] button, and within 3

seconds, select “RecSel:CD” with the [CD]

input source button.

Now, the CD player has been selected as the audio

input source, and VIDEO 3 as the video input

source.

Start recording on the VCR, and start play-

ing on the CD player and the video cam-

era.

Playback starts on the component selected in

steps 3-6.

Note:

Switching the source during audio/video record-

ing will record the source newly selected.

Connecting Net Audio

– USA, Canada, and Australian models –

You can enjoy Net Audio when the ETHERNET ter-

minal board [B] (for Net Audio) is inserted.

The RDC-7.1 can be used as a Net-Tune client on a

standard Ethernet network, allowing you to play music

(MP3, WAV) stored on your Net-Tune server such as

Integra NAS-2.3 Network Audio Server through the

RDC-7.1. If your network is connected to the Internet,

you can also tune into Internet radio stations.

Internet Radio

With Internet radio you can:

• Listen to stations that use MP3 format streaming.

• Select stations by genre, location, or language.

• Preset up to 30 Internet radio stations.

Net-Tune

For audio delivery over Ethernet, IntegraRESEARCH

developed NTSP (Net-Tune System Protocol). Since it’s

based on the industry standard TCP/IP protocol, it’s

efﬁcient and very responsive.

The Net-Tune server supports the MP3 and WAV for-

mats.

•

WAV:

high-quality, uncompressed, linear PCM.

•

MP3:

high-quality, compressed, small ﬁle size.

For more information about Net-Tune, see the following

IntegraRESEARCH Web sites.

• http://www.integraresearch.com/

Network Requirements

■

Ethernet Network

The RDC-7.1’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For

best results, a 100Base-T switched Ethernet network is

recommended. Although it’s theoretically possible to

use a wireless network, due to unpredictable perfor-

mance, it may not provide satisfactory results, so a

wired network is recommended.

■

Ethernet Router

A router manages the network, routing data and supply-

ing IP addresses. Your router must support the follow-

ing:

• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows

several networked computers to access the Internet

simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The

RDC-7.1 needs Internet access for Internet radio.

• DHCP (Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol).

DHCP supplies IP address information to network

devices, allowing them to conﬁgure themselves auto-

matically.

• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom-

mended.

Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs

require you to use speciﬁc routers. Please consult your

ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.

■

CAT5 Ethernet cable

Use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type).

■

Internet Access (for Internet radio)

To use Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have

Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,

56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory

results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom-

mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please

consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.

About Net-Tune

Operations

Connecting Net Audio – USA, Canada, and Australian models –

—Continued

Notes:

• To use Internet radio with the RDC-7.1, your broad-

band Internet connection needs to be up and running

and able to access the Web. Please consult your ISP if

you have any problems with your Internet connec-

tion.

• The RDC-7.1 uses DHCP and AutoIP to conﬁgure its

network settings automatically. If you want to conﬁg-

ure these settings manually, see page 122.

• The RDC-7.1 does not support PPPoE settings, so if

you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must

use a PPPoE-compatible router.

• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a

proxy server to use Internet radio. If your PC is con-

ﬁgured to use a proxy server, use the same settings

(see page 122).

To connect the RDC-7.1 to your Ethernet network, plug one end of a CAT5 Ethernet cable into the ETHERNET (Net-

Tune) port, and plug the other end into a LAN port on your router or switch.

The following diagram shows how you can connect the RDC-7.1 to your Ethernet network. Here it’s connected to a

LAN port on the router, which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.

You can connect any number of RDC-7.1s to the network, and the Net-Tune server can serve up to three clients

simultaneously, so you can enjoy Net-Tune in three separate rooms simultaneously. The following diagram shows a Net-

Tune network with two RDC-7.1s.

Networking Your RDC-7.1

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/EBU

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

(

HD/BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/BNC

)

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UJJ

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

232

OUT

ANTENNA

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

WAN port

LAN port

LAN/

Ethernet

port

Internet radio

Modem

Router

RDC-7.1

LAN/

Ethernet

port

Internet radio

Net-Tune server such as Integra

NAS-2.3 Network Audio Server

Router

LAN port

Modem

Room 1 Room 2

LAN port

Net-Tune server such as Integra

NAS-2.3 Network Audio Server

Connecting Net Audio

– Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –

A Net-Tune server is a computer server running Net-

Tune system protocol, including a Net-Tune-compatible

home server or a PC with Net-Tune Central installed.

The RDC-7.1 can be used as a Net-Tune client on a stan-

dard Ethernet network. By installing IntegraRESEARCH’s

Net-Tune Central server software on your computer, you

can play all of your MP3, WMA, and WAV ﬁles through

the RDC-7.1. If your network is connected to the Internet,

you can also tune into Internet radio stations.

Internet Radio

With Internet radio you can:

• Listen to stations that use MP3 or WMA format

streaming.

• Select stations by genre, location, or language.

• Preset up to 30 Internet radio stations.

Net-Tune

For audio delivery over Ethernet, Onkyo developed

NTSP (Net-Tune System Protocol). Since it’s based on

the industry standard TCP/IP protocol, it’s efﬁcient and

very responsive.

You can download the Net-Tune Central server software

from the following Web sites:

•

Europe:

http://www.integraresearch.net/

•

Asia, Oceania, and Latin America:

http://www.intl.onkyo.com/

Net-Tune Central searches your PC’s hard disk for

music ﬁles and automatically creates a music database,

making it very easy to set up. Net-Tune clients, includ-

ing the RDC-7.1, can then play music in the database.

Net-Tune Central supports the following ﬁle formats,

and sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.

•

WAV:

high quality, uncompressed, linear PCM.

•

MP3:

high quality, compressed, small ﬁle size.

•

WMA:

high quality, compressed, smaller ﬁle size

than MP3, developed by Microsoft (Protected WMA

ﬁles cannot be played).

Before you download Net-Tune Central, you’ll be

prompted to enter the serial number printed on the rear

of your RDC-7.1. Depending on your Internet connec-

tion, it may take 10 or more minutes to download.

Net-Tune Central Editing Functions

With Net-Tune Central you can edit the titles, album,

and artist names of your MP3, WMA, and WAV ﬁles,

and create and edit genre names. In addition, you can

make playlists of your favorite tracks.

Computer Requirements

The computer requirements necessary for running the

Net-Tune Central server software are as follows:

•

Operating system:

Windows XP or 2000 (Mac OS

not supported).

•

Processor:

Intel Pentium III, 600 MHz or higher

•

Memory:

128 MB (Windows 2000)

256 MB (Windows XP)

•

Display:

800 x 600 pixels or higher, High Color

• LAN/Ethernet network port

• Sound capabilities

•

Hard disk:

At least 20 MB for Net-Tune Central.

Obviously you’ll also need space to store your music

ﬁles. MP3 and WMA uses approximately 1 MB per

minute, while WAV uses approximately 10 MB per

minute, although this will depend on the sampling rate

and bit rate that you use. MP3 ﬁles made using certain

encoders may not be playable, or may be noisy when

played.

Network Requirements

■

Ethernet Network

The RDC-7.1’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For

best results, a 100Base-T switched Ethernet network is

recommended. Although it’s theoretically possible to

use a wireless network, due to unpredictable perfor-

mance, it may not provide satisfactory results, so a

wired network is recommended.

■

Ethernet Router

A router manages the network, routing data and supply-

ing IP addresses. Your router must support the follow-

ing:

• NAT (Network Address Translation).

NAT allows several networked computers to access

the Internet simultaneously via a single Internet con-

nection. The RDC-7.1 needs Internet access for Inter-

net radio.

• DHCP (Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol).

DHCP supplies IP address information to network

devices, allowing them to conﬁgure themselves auto-

matically.

• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom-

mended.

Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs

require you to use speciﬁc routers. Please consult your

ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.

■

CAT5 Ethernet cable

Use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight type).

■

Internet Access (for Internet radio)

To use Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have

Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,

56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory

results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom-

mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc.). Please

consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.

About Net-Tune

Operations

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –

—Continued

Notes:

• To use Internet radio with the RDC-7.1, your broad-

band Internet connection needs to be up and running

and able to access the Web. Please consult your ISP if

you have any problems with your Internet connection.

• The RDC-7.1 uses DHCP and AutoIP to conﬁgure its

network settings automatically. If you want to conﬁgure

these settings manually, see page 122.

• The RDC-7.1 does not support PPPoE settings, so if

you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must

use a PPPoE compatible router.

• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a

proxy server to use Internet radio. If your PC is con-

ﬁgured to use a proxy server, use the same settings

(See page 122).

To connect the RDC-7.1 to your Ethernet network, plug one end of a CAT5 Ethernet cable into the ETHERNET (Net-

Tune) port, and plug the other end into a LAN port on your router or switch.

The following diagram shows how you can connect the RDC-

7.1 to your Ethernet network. Here it is connected to a

LAN port on the router, which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.

You can connect any number of RDC-7.1s to the network, and Net-Tune Central can serve up to three clients simulta-

neously, so you can enjoy Net-Tune in three separate rooms simultaneously. The following diagram shows a Net-Tune

network with two RDC-7.1s.

You can install Net-Tune central on several networked computers and use the RDC-7.1’s Select Server setting to select

the server whose music database you want to access (See page 99).

When you use a broadband router with the DHCP function enabled, the network settings will be conﬁgured automati-

cally. In this case, you do not have to make any settings using the setup menu. If you disabled the DHCP function on

the broadband router, conﬁgure the network settings manually referring to page 122.

Networking Your RDC-7.1

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

REMOTE

CONTROL

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/EBU

AUDIO IN

LRRL

GND

OUT

FGL

HDMI, the HDMI logo

is a trademark

or registered

trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

(

HD/BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

HD/BNC

)

MAIN

12V

TRIGGER

OUT

UJJ

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

ZONE

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

232

OUT

ANTENNA

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

To the LAN

side port

To the LAN

side port

To the WAN side

Internet radio

Modem

Router

LAN port/

Ethernet, etc.

RDC-7.1

Internet radio

To the WAN side

Router

To the LAN side port

Modem

Room 1 Room 2

About Network Conﬁguration

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –

—Continued

To select Net-Tune mode, press the [Mode] button,

and then roll the scroll wheel until “NET-T” appears

on the display.

Note:

While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is

illuminated, the scroll wheel changes the input source

and remote controller mode simultaneously (when you

enter the Net-Tune mode, be sure that the LCD display

shows “MSRV” or “IRD” in the top line and “NET-T” in

the bottom line).

Using the Remote Controller

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

Operations

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –

—Continued

Number/letter buttons

These buttons are used to enter numbers and letters

when searching for music in your Net-Tune server.

Mode button

This button is used with the scroll wheel to select

the remote controller modes. Press this button ﬁrst,

and then roll the scroll wheel until “NET-T” appears

on the display.

Up/Down/Left/Right /// & Enter

buttons

These buttons are used to navigate Internet radio

and Net-Tune server menus. The [Enter] button is

used to conﬁrm items and to start playback of the

Net-Tune server.

CH/Disc +/– button

This button is used to select Internet radio presets.

Play button

This button is used to start playback of the Net-Tune

server.

Previous/Next / buttons

The Previous button is used to select the pre-

vious track. During playback it selects the begin-

ning of the current track. The Next button is

used to select the next track.

Pause button

This button is used to pause playback.

Repeat button

This button is used for repeat playback.

Album button

This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s

music library by album.

Playlist button

This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s

library by playlist.

Caps button

This button is used to select lowercase letters,

uppercase letters, and numbers when searching for

the Net-Tune server’s music by album, artist, or

playlist.

Delete button

This button is used to delete characters entered with

the number/letter buttons.

Input button

This button is used to select the input source. Press

this button ﬁrst, and then roll the scroll wheel until

“MSRV” (Music Server) or “IRD” (Internet Radio)

appears on the display.

FR/FF / buttons

The FR button is used to start fast reverse. The

FF button is used to start fast forward.

Stop button

This button is used to stop playback.

Random button

This button is used for random playback.

Artist button

This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s

music library by artist.

Genre button

This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s

music library by genre, and to search for Internet

radio stations by genre.

Location button

This button is used to search for Internet radio sta-

tions by country.

JLanguage button

This button is used to search for Internet radio sta-

tions by language.

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –

—Continued

To listen to Internet radio, the connection/conﬁguration

requirements listed on pages 74, 76 must be satisfied.

Enjoying Internet Radio

While neither the [Input] button

nor [Mode] button is illuminated,

roll the scroll wheel to select

IRD (Internet Radio).

“NET-T” appears in the bottom line.

On the RDC-7.1, press the [Net Audio]

button. This button switches between

two alternative settings: Server and

Internet Radio.

Press the [Display] button on the

remote controller.

If the main menu has been already dis-

played, go to the next step.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select

one of the main menus: Genre,

Location, or Language.

To cancel, press the [ ] button.

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

RC-554M

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Master Volume

Power

DVD Video 1Video 2Video 3Video 4Video 5Video 6Video 7Tape 1Tape 2Tuner Phono Net Audio

C D Open/Close

Zone 2()

GRN

Rec/

Zone 3()

RED

O f f

Phones

Clear

Rec/ Zone 3Zone 2Off DSPDisplay Tuning Tuning ModePreset Memory Setup ExitEnter

Dimmer

AV Controller RDC-7.1

Display

CH/Disc +/–Enter,

Input

Net Audio

///

Mode

Scroll wheel

Display

Enter

Press the [Enter] button.

Wait while your requested data is down-

load from the XiVA Internet Radio Ser-

vice.

*What is the XiVA Internet Radio Ser-

vice?

The XiVA Internet Radio Service pro-

vides tuning information, allowing

you to select from a large number of

stations. You can ﬁnd Internet Radio

Stations based on your interests,

musical taste, language, and location.

When Genre is selected:

Allow a few moments until the Genre

menu appears. When the main list of

genres appears, use the [ ]/[ ] buttons

to select the genre desired. Pressing the

[Enter] button brings up the sub-list of

the genre you selected, which prompts

you to further select one of the items

using the [ ]/[ ] buttons.

When Location is selected:

The list containing names of countries

appears. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to

select the desired item.

When Language is selected:

The list of languages appears. Use the

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select your desired

item.

If no list is found, “No List” appears.

You can return from this screen to the

previous selection screen by pressing the

[ ] button.

Press the [Enter] button.

You are presented with a list of radio sta-

tion names.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select

one of the radio stations.

You can return to the previous step by

pressing the [ ] button.

Enter

Operations

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –

—Continued

Presetting Internet Radio Stations

You can preset up to 30 Internet radio stations.

Choosing a Preset Internet Radio Station

Erasing a preset Internet radio station

Press the [Enter] button.

Buffering starts with the following mes-

sage displayed.

When the buffering is complete, the

RDC-7.1 starts playback of the broad-

cast.

Note:

If you’re using a narrowband Internet

connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN),

depending on the station, Internet radio

may not work satisfactorily. For best

results use a broadband connection (e.g.,

cable modem, xDSL modem, etc.).

You can switch the displayed content

using the [ ]/[ ] buttons.

After the switch operation, the display

mode appears for 3 seconds, and then

the appropriate information scrolls.

If there is no information on title or art-

ist, “No Info” appears.

When using the OSD screen, all the

information is displayed on one screen

without scrolling.

Receive your desired station.

Press the [ ] button.

The RDC-7.1 enters into preset mode;

the currently selected preset number

blinks for 5 seconds.

Enter

iNet Radio Station ONK

7ch

Title: Station ONK Live

Program:

Station ONK Live

Artist: RealOnkyoNet.com

Data: WMA 20kbps

Tuned

OSD

Display

Enter

Preset number

Press the [Enter] button.

The preset is now complete.

While neither the [Input] button

nor [Mode] button is illuminated,

roll the scroll wheel to select IRD

(Internet Radio).

Use the remote controller’s

[CH Disc +/–] button to select the

preset.

When you choose a preset station, the

station name is displayed for 5 seconds,

and then the progress of buffering is dis-

played instead.

When the progress of buffering reaches

100%, you will be presented with the

playing screen.

Select the station to erase, follow-

ing the instructions described

above.

Press the [ ] button.

The RDC-7.1 enters into preset erase

mode.

Press the [Enter] button.

Your selected station is erased.

Enter

Disc

Enter

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –

—Continued

To play music ﬁles saved on your PC, the requirements

listed on page 76 must be satisﬁed.

• To stop playback:

Press the [ ] button on the remote controller.

• To pause playback:

Press the [ ] button on the remote controller.

• To select a track:

Press the [ ]/[ ] button on the remote control-

ler.

Press the [ ] button to move to the next track.

Press the [ ] button to move to the beginning of

the current track; hold down the [ ] button to

move to the previous track.

You can also use the number/letter buttons to select a

track.

Examples:

To select number 3, press 3.

To select number 10, press --/---, 1 and 0.

To select number 37, press --/---, 3 and 7.

To select number 123, press --/--- twice, and then

press 1, 2 and 3.

To select number 2568, press --/--- third, and then

press 2, 5, 6, and 8.

• To fast forward/reverse the music:

Press and hold the [ ]

button on the remote con-

troller to fast forward the music; press and hold the

[ ] button to fast reverse the music. When the

music track is back at its beginning, normal playing

starts.

• To switch to the track list:

While playing the music, you can press the [ ] but-

ton to display a list of currently open tracks.

Playing a Music File Saved on the

Net-Tune Server

Turn on the Net-Tune server.

Wait until the Net-Tune server starts up.

It may take a few second.

Turn on the RDC-7.1.

When you connect the RDC-7.1 to the net-

work the ﬁrst time, it will be connected to

the ﬁrst server found.

While neither the [Input] button

nor [Mode] button is illuminated,

roll the scroll wheel to select

MSRV (Music Server).

“NET-T” appears in the bottom line.

On the RDC-7.1, press the [Net Audio] but-

ton. This button switches between two alter-

native settings: Server and Internet Radio.

Until the RDC-7.1 connects to the net-

work, ﬁnds the server, and completes the

connection, “Network Starting...” and

“Connecting...” appears. After complet-

ing the connection to the Net-Tune

server, the display changes to the normal

indication.

If the following messages appear, check

the message meaning and perform the

appropriate procedures.

“No Track”

The Net-Tune server could not retrieve

any track information. Register tracks

with the Net-Tune server.

If you have already registered tracks, use

the [Display], [Artist], [Album],

[Genre], and [Playlist] buttons to display

information.

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

RC-554M

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Rrepeat

Input

Playlist Genre

Artist

Random

Album

Display

Mode

Enter,

///

, , ,

Scroll wheel

Number/letter

buttons

“Disconnected”

The Net-Tune server may not start or the

server connected to previously may not

be found. Conﬁrm the connections

between router, the Net-Tune server, and

the RDC-7.1. Start the Net-Tune server

or select another server referring to

“Select Server” on “Music Server Sub-

menu” (See page 99).

Press the [ ] button to play the

music ﬁle.

The RDC-7.1 provides ﬁve normal dis-

play modes; you can use the

[

]/[ ]

but-

ton to switch among them.

Remote

controller

Music Server Play

Track: 1/12 1m20s>

My sweet candy

Album:

My Best 100

Artist:Happy PanPot

Data:

MP3 160kbps

OSD

Display

Operations

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –

—Continued

Selecting a Track List

You can use the music ﬁle data saved on the Net-Tune

server to select which tracks to play.

For example, you can:

• Select a track list based on the album name

• Select a track list based on the artist name

• Select a track list based on the genre name

• Select a play list

Using the number/letter buttons

The number/letter buttons allow you to input one of the

letters or numbers printed on their key tops. Pressing the

[Caps] button cyclically switches the types of input:

Upper case (A)

→

Lower case (a)

→

Numeric value (2)

→

... When your desired input type is selected, then

press the number/letter button.

Let us take the [2ABC] button as an example to see the

operation.

When the upper case is selected:

Pressing the button once will perform a search by the

letter “A.” Pressing twice will do a search by “B,” press-

ing three times by “C.”

When the lower case is selected:

Pressing the button once will perform a search by the

letter “a.” Pressing twice will do a search by “b,” press-

ing three times by “c.”

When the numeric value is selected:

Pressing the button once will perform a search by the

numeric value “2.”

To cancel the operation:

Press the [ ] button to return to the previous step. You

can cancel the whole operation by pressing the [ ] but-

ton in step 1.

Notes:

• Press the [Delete

]

button to delete the entered letter or

number.

• Pressing the [Display] button on the main unit will

display the current listening mode.

Playing a Music File At Random

Playing a Music File Repeatedly

Press either the [Album], [Artist],

[Genre], or [Playlist] button on the

remote controller.

Search the tracks stored on the Net-Tune

server with your selected mode to display it

in the display.

In the artist and album modes, the tracks

are displayed in alphabetical order.

You can also use the procedure below.

1. Press the [Display] button.

2. You can press the [ ]/[ ] buttons to

cyclically switch among the four

modes: Albums

↔

Artists

↔

Genres

↔

Playlists.

3. Press the [Enter] button.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select

one from the menu.

At this time, pressing [ ] button brings

you one step back where you can change

the selection you made.

Also, pressing [ ] button in the genre

or artist selection mode will display a

list of albums with the genre or artist

you selected.

In the album, artist, or playlist selection

mode, using the number/letter buttons

will accelerate your selection operation

(See below).

Press the [Enter] button.

The title of your selected track appears.

You can choose another track by pressing

the [ ]/[ ] buttons.

Press the [ ] button to return to the pre-

vious step.

You can also select the list number using

the number/letter buttons.

Press the [Enter] button.

The playback begins.

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Test

Tone

CH SEL Level

Level

Enter

Press the [Random] button on the

remote controller when in stop mode.

This button displays the current random

settings and switches between two alter-

native settings: On and Off.

On:

Randomly plays the tracks in the

currently selected mode.

Off:

Random mode is disabled.

After the necessary settings are com-

plete, press the [ ] button.

Press the [Repeat] button on the

remote controller.

This button displays the current repeat

settings and cyclically switches among

three alternative settings: Repeat 1

→

All

→

Off.

Repeat 1:

Repeats the current track only.

Repeat All:

Repeats the tracks in the

currently selected mode.

Repeat Off:

Repeat mode is disabled.

You can operate the RDC-7.1 when

playing and when stopped.

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Test Tone

CH SEL

Re-EQ

Level

L Night

Audio SEL

Caps

Random

Repeat

Pure A

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –

—Continued

The music server settings can be made while you select

the music server as an input source.

Conﬁguring the Music Server

Press the [Input] button, and

then roll the scroll wheel to select

MSRV.

Make sure that the “MSRV” is displayed

when you conﬁgure the music server.

Press the scroll wheel, and then

press the [Setup] button to display

the Main Menu.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select

“Input Setup,” then press the

[Enter] button.

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Muting

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Enter

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Input

Setup

Enter,

///

Scroll wheel

Input

Enter

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select

the “Music Server” sub-menu,

then press the [Enter] button.

The setup screen for the sub-menu

appears.

Use the [ ] and [ ] cursor but-

tons to select “Select Server” and

then use the [ ] and [ ] cursor

buttons to select the desired

server.

Select a network server that exists on the

network.

* mark appears next to the servers

detected on the network. If there is a

server that does not have a * mark, make

sure that the server is running.

“Not Found” message indicates that no

server is currently available for selec-

tion. If the message appears, make sure

that the server is connected and running.

Press the [Setup] button.

This completes the conﬁguration proce-

dure and the menu disappears.

Tips:

When choosing settings on the RDC-7.1,

use the input source buttons, the [Setup]

button, the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons,

and the [Enter] button.

Enter

Operations

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –

—Continued

Music Server Memo

Internet Radio Memo

Setup Menu

When making the various settings required to conﬁgure your RDC-7.1 for optimum performance, you can use either

the OSD Menu that appears on your television monitor or you can use the display on the front of the RDC-7.1. The OSD

Menu is a settings menu that is displayed on your TV monitor.

The RDC-7.1 is equipped with an independent Setup Menu not only for Main room A but also for Main room B and

Zone 2 room, which allows you to specify settings for each room. The Setup Menu includes various menus. These

menus are then divided into various sub-menus, and these contain settings for you to optimize your home theater as you

wish.

The display shown below is an example. The actual contents of your display may differ depending on the model

for your region, the option boards installed, and the selected input source.

For more information on operating instructions, see pages 90-123.

OSD Map (MAIN A)

Main A Setup

=====================

0.Hardware Setup

1.Speaker/Output Setup

2.Input Setup

3.Listening Mode Setup

4.Audio Adjust

5.Preference

6.i.LINK Setup

7.Network Setup

8.Lock/Version

1.Speaker/Output Setup

=====================

1.Speaker Configuration

2.Speaker Crossover

3.Speaker Distance

4.Notch Filter

5.Level Calibration

6.THX Audio Setup

7.Audio Output Assign

8.Video Output Assign

2.Input Setup

==Input:XXXXXX=======

1.Audio Assign

2.Video Assign

3.Listening Mode Preset

4.Character Edit

5.IntelliVolume

6.Delay

7.12V Trigger Assign

0.Hardware Setup

=====================

1.Remote Control Setup

2.TV Format Setup

3.AM Frequency Setup

3.Listening Mode Setup

=====================

1.Mono Setup

2.Multiplex Setup

3.Stereo Setup

4.Direct, Pure Audio

Setup

5.Multichannel Input

Setup

6.i.LINK(IEEE1394)

:DVD-Audio Input Setup

7.i.LINK(IEEE1394)

:SACD Input Setup

8.Dolby Digital Setup

9.DTS Setup

10.AAC Setup

11.Dolby Pro Logic

IIx/

DTS NEO:6 Setup

12.THX Setup

13.Mono Movie Setup

14.Enhance Setup

15.Orchestra Setup

16.Unplugged Setup

17.Studio-Mix Setup

18.TV Logic Setup

19.All Ch Stereo Setup

20.Full Mono Setup

21.Dolby Virtual

Speaker Setup

22.Dolby Headphone

Setup

Reference

pages

Main menu

100

101

102

103

104

105

107

108

109

110

111

113

114

115

116

117

118

*The text appearing with your unit may

differ slightly than those printed here,

however there is no difference in items to

be displayed or their meanings.

Setup Menu

—Continued

Main A Setup

=====================

0.Hardware Setup

1.Speaker/Output Setup

2.Input Setup

3.Listening Mode Setup

4.Audio Adjust

5.Preference

6.i.LINK Setup

7.Network Setup

8.Lock/Version

4.Audio Adjust

=====================

1.Tone Control

5.Preference

=====================

1.Volume Setup

2.Headphone Level Setup

3.OSD Setup

4.OSD Position

7.Network Setup

=====================

1.IP Address

2.Proxy

3.MAC Address

4.Client

→

Save Settings

8.Lock/Version

=====================

1.Lock Setup

2.Firmware Version

6.i.LINK Setup

=====================

1.Wakeup Setup

2.OSD for DVD

3.OSD for DVD

(Zone 2)

4.System Control Setup

Reference

pages

119

120

121

122

123

Setup Menu

—Continued

OSD Map (MAIN B)

Main B Setup

=====================

0.Hardware Setup

1.Speaker Setup

2.Input Setup

3.Audio Adjust

4.Preference

0.Hardware Setup

=====================

1.TV Format Setup

1.Speaker Setup

=====================

1.Speaker Crossover

2.Speaker Distance

3.Level Calibration

4.THX Audio Setup

2.Input Setup

==Input:XXXXXXXXX====

1.Listening Mode Preset

2.Delay

3.Audio Adjust

=====================

1.Tone Control

4.Preference

=====================

1.Volume Setup

2.OSD Setup

3.OSD Position

Reference

pages

Main menu

100

102

119

120

Setup Menu

—Continued

OSD Map (ZONE 2)

0.Hardware Setup

=====================

1.TV Format Setup

3.Audio Adjust

=====================

1.Tone Control

4.Preference

=====================

1.Volume Setup

2.OSD Setup

3.OSD Position

1.Input Setup

==Input:XXXXXXXXX====

1.Listening Mode Preset

2.Delay

2.Listening Mode Setup

=====================

1.Mono Setup

2.Multiplex Setup

3.Stereo Setup

4.Dolby Digital Setup

5.DTS Setup

6.AAC Setup

7.Dolby Virtual

Speaker Setup

Zone 2 Setup

=====================

0.Hardware Setup

1.Input Setup

2.Listening Mode Setup

3.Audio Adjust

4.Preference

The Zone 2 settings shown on this

page can be made when you

perform the following settings in the

“MAIN A” setup menu.

• Under the “Speaker/Output

Setup → Audio (Video) Output

Assign” menu, when you select

the output terminal setting to

“Zone 2 Out.”

Reference

pages

100

102

103

104

109

110

111

117

119

120

Setup Menu

—Continued

You can change Setup Menu settings using the buttons on the front panel and on the remote controller.

The illustrations here represent the remote controller.

When setting on the RDC-7.1, use the [Setup] button, the

[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons and the [Enter] button. In

addition, the [Exit] button is used instead of the [Return]

button.

Navigating the Setup Menu

Main A Setup

=====================

0.Hardware Setup

1.Speaker/Output Setup

2.Input Setup

3.Listening Mode Setup

4.Audio Adjust

5.Preference

6.i.LINK Setup

7.Network Setup

8.Lock/Version

1.Speaker/Output Setup

=====================

1.Speaker Configuration

2.Speaker Crossover

3.Speaker Distance

4.Notch Filter

5.Level Calibration

6.THX Audio Setup

7.Audio Output Assign

8.Video Output Assign

1-1.Speaker Config

=====================

Speaker A

a.Front L/R :Main A

b.Center :Main A

c.Surr L/R :Main A

d.Surr Back

:Main A 2ch

e.Subwoofer :Main A

OSD

Front panel

display

Main menu

Sub-menu

Press the scroll wheel when using the

remote controller.

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Zone 2

Main A,

Main B

Setup/

Enter/

Return/

/ / /

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

Press the button of the room where you

want to perform operations.

Press [Main A], [Main B], or [Zone 2].

If the room where you want to perform operations

has already been activated, you do not have to press

the button here. Pressing the button while the

corresponding room is activated deactivates the

room for setup.

Press the [Setup] button.

The main menu appears on your television monitor.

Using the [ ] and [ ] cursor buttons,

select the menu that you want to enter.

Press the [Enter] button to enter the

selected menu.

The screen for that menu appears.

Use the [ ] and [ ] cursor buttons to

select the sub-menu that you want to

enter and press the [Enter] button.

Each sub-menu has different settings that can be

changed as desired, and they are all explained in

the pages that follow. To change a setting, ﬁrst

select it using the [ ] and [ ] cursor buttons,

and then change the setting using the [ ] and

[ ] cursor buttons.

Press the [Setup] button to exit the Setup

Menu.

Press the [Return] button to set the new settings

and return to the previous menu.

Setup Menu

Hardware Setup

In this section, you will perform the initial settings for the following scenarios.

• When you want to change the RDC-7.1’s remote control ID.

• When you want to ﬁx the TV Format setting to PAL or NTSC.

• When you want to ﬁx the AM Frequency Step setting to 9 kHz or 10 kHz.

Remote ID

This section explains how to change the RDC-7.1’s

remote control ID. You may need to change this if the

RDC-7.1’s remote controller interferes with other

IntegraRESEARCH components located in the same

room. You can select 1, 2, or 3 for remote control ID.

If you change the RDC-7.1’s remote control ID, be sure

to select the same ID for the remote controller (See page

142). The default ID for both the RDC-7.1 and remote

controller is 1.

Note:

It is recommended that you perform setup using the

[Setup]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Exit] buttons of the

RDC-7.1’s front panel. If the remote controller is used

for setup, signals from the remote controller will not be

received just after the remote control ID settings have

been changed (See “Changing the Remote Controller’s

Control ID” on page 142 to change the remote control

ID for the remote controller).

TV Format (for all models other than USA and

Canadian models)

The settings in the TV Format sub-menu can be

conﬁgured for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

When you want to reconﬁgure the settings to conform

to the television format used in the area where you use

the RDC-7.1, use this sub-menu so that no time is

wasted on detection.

Auto:

This is the default setting. When you leave this

setting unchanged, the television format is detected and

automatically set by the RDC-7.1.

PAL:

Use this setting when you know the television

format is PAL.

NTSC:

Use this setting when you know the television

format is NTSC.

Frequency Step

The setting in this sub-menu determines the incremental

or decremental amount when adjusting the AM tuner

frequency. The initial setting is 9 kHz, and this only

needs to be changed if you are using the RDC-7.1 in a

10 kHz region.

9 kHz:

Select if 9 kHz increments are used in your area.

10 kHz:

Select if 10 kHz increments are used in your

area.

Remote Control Setup Sub-menu

TV Format Sub-menu

AM Frequency Setup Sub-menu

(Asian and Australian Models Only)

Speaker/Output Setup

The RDC-7.1 provides a wide range of variations in speaker connections and speaker settings, so you have to specify

speaker settings according to conditions of each variation. For proper selection of an AV device connected at switching

of the input type, you also need to allocate “audio output” and “video output” to each input type. If this allocation is

incorrect, the desired component will not play a selected input source.

Please setup correctly by referring to the information you wrote down in the Your System Setting booklet.

Specify the rooms where you want to use speakers.

Specify according to settings for main room A.

Note:

Basically, a speaker set with the maximum number of

speakers should be assigned to the Speaker A and

conﬁgured for main room A (Main A).

When either the center, surround, or surround back

speakers are not conﬁgured to the Speaker A terminals,

or any of these speakers is set to “Not Used” in the

Speaker A settings, you cannot perform the settings for

the corresponding speakers conﬁgured to the Speaker B.

(Speaker A) Front L/R

The setting of the front speakers is initially ﬁxed to

Main A.

Always install speakers conﬁgured to (Speaker A) Front

L/R in main room A.

(Speaker A) Center, Surr L/R

Main A (default):

Select this when using the center

speaker and/or surround speakers in main room A.

Not Used:

Select this when not using a center speaker

or surround speakers.

(Speaker A) Surr Back

Main A 2ch (default):

If Surr L/R is set to “Main A,”

you can select this item. Select this when connecting

and using two surround back speakers in main room A.

Main A 1ch (SBL):

If Surr L/R is set to “Main A,” you

can select this item. Select this when connecting and

using a surround back speaker in main room A.

Bi-Amp for Front:

Select this when using the front

speaker in main room A by connecting the front channel

and the surround back channel to the speaker via Bi-

Amp (See page 27).

Not Used:

Select this when not using surround back

speakers.

Note:

If “Not Used” is selected for Surr L/R, this item defaults

to “Not Used.”

(Speaker A) Subwoofer

Main A (default):

Select this when using a subwoofer

in main room A.

Not Used:

Select this when not using a subwoofer in

main room A.

(Speaker B) Front L/R

Main A:

Select this when using in main room A.

Main B:

Select this when using in main room B.

Not Used (default):

Select this when not using.

(Speaker B) Center

Main A:

Select this when using in main room A.

Main B:

Select this when using in main room B. This

setting can only be made when you set the “(Speaker B)

Front L/R” setting to “Main B.”

Not Used (default):

Select this when not using.

(Speaker B) Surr L/R

Main A:

Select this when using in main room A.

Main B:

Select this when using in main room B. This

setting can only be made when you set the “(Speaker B)

Front L/R” setting to “Main B.”

Not Used (default):

Select this when not using.

(Speaker B) Surr Back

Main A 2ch:

Select this when connecting and using two

surround back speakers in main room A.

Main A 1ch (SBL):

Select this when connecting and

using a surround back speaker in main room A.

Main B 2ch:

If (Speaker B) Front L/R and Surr L/R are

both set to “Main B,” you can select this item. Select

this when connecting and using two surround back

speakers in main room B.

Main B 1ch (SBL):

If (Speaker B) Front L/R and Surr

L/R are both set to “Main B,” you can select this item.

Select this when connecting and using a surround back

speaker in main room B.

Bi-Amp for Front:

This setting can be made only when

you set the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” setting to “Main A”

or “Main B.” Select this when using the front speaker in

main room B by connecting the front channel and the

surround back channel to the speaker via Bi-Amp (See

page 27).

Not Used (default):

Select this when not using

surround back speakers.

Note:

If (Speaker A) Surr Back is set to “Main A 1ch,” you

cannot select “Main A 2ch” and “Main B 2ch” here.

(Speaker B) Subwoofer

This setting can be made only when you set the “(Speaker

B) Front L/R” setting to “Main A” or “Main B.”

Main A:

Select this when using a subwoofer in main

room A.

Main B:

Select this when using a subwoofer in main

room B. This setting can only be made when you set the

“(Speaker B) Front L/R” setting to “Main B.”

Not Used (default):

Select this when not using a

subwoofer.

When the settings for Speaker Conﬁguration are

completed, the subsequent settings should be speci-

ﬁed separately in main room A, main room B, and

Zone 2.

Speaker Conﬁguration Sub-menu

Setup Menu

Speaker/Output Setup

—Continued

The settings in the Speaker Crossover sub-menu can be

conﬁgured for both “Main A” and “Main B.”

Front L/R, Center, Surr L/R, Surr Back

Specify a threshold frequency in Hz for bass sounds

from each speaker to be output from the subwoofer.

When no subwoofer is used, (Speaker A) Front L/R is

automatically set to “Full Band,” and bass sounds from

each speaker are output from the front speakers. You

can also set other speakers to “Full Band.”

You can specify the frequency at 10 Hz increments

between 40-150 Hz. When using a THX-Select-certiﬁed

speaker system, specify the setting of

80 Hz (THX)

(default).

• If you specify the frequency of the front speakers

between 40-150 Hz, you cannot select “Full Band”

for the other speakers.

• For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not

Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, no

associated setting item is displayed.

• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, no item for

surround back speakers is displayed.

LPF of LFE (setting of the low-pass ﬁlter for

LFE)

Specify the low-pass ﬁlter for LFE (Low Frequency

Effect).

The low-pass ﬁlter passes through only the signal

components below the speciﬁed frequency, eliminating

the unwanted noise.

You can specify the frequency at 10 Hz increments

between 40-150 Hz.

SW Mode (Subwoofer Mode)

This item is displayed when a subwoofer is used (any

item other than “Not Used” is selected for Subwoofer

on the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu), and Front L/R

is set to “Full Band” on the Speaker Crossover sub-

menu. Set the sound from the subwoofer to any of the

following:

LFE only:

The subwoofer outputs only LFE (Low

Frequency Effect) information.

D. Bass:

The subwoofer outputs not only LFE (Low

Frequency Effect) factors but also bass sounds from the

front speakers.

Measure the distance between the listening position and

each speaker. Specifying the distance will synchronize

the speakers in terms of the time that sounds from each

speaker reach the listening position. This is an

important speciﬁcation for you to enjoy realistic home

theater. The settings in the Speaker Distance sub-menu

can be conﬁgured for both “Main A” and “Main B.”

Perform the setup procedure below following the

operating instructions described on page 90.

1. Select the unit of distance from “Unit.”

You can select either “feet” or “meters.” The default

varies depending on the region.

2. Set the distance you measured. Enter all the values

for every speaker you connected.

• For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not

Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, no

associated setting item is displayed.

• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, no item for

surround back speakers is displayed.

When “feet” is selected:

Front L, Center, Front R, and Subwoofer can be set at

0.1 foot intervals in a range from 1.0 foot to 30.0 feet.

The default is 12.0 feet.

Surr R, Surr Back (or Surr Bk R and Surr Bk L), and

Surr L can be set at 0.1 foot intervals in a range from 1.0

foot to 30.0 feet. The default is 7.0 feet.

When “meters” is selected:

Front L, Center, Front R, and Subwoofer can be set at

0.03 meter intervals in a range from 0.30 meters to 9.00

meters. The default is 3.60 meters.

Surr R, Surr Back (or Surr Bk R and Surr Bk L), and

Surr L can be set at 0.03 meter intervals in a range from

0.30 meters to 9.00 meters. The default is 2.10 meters.

To conﬁgure the settings under the Notch Filter sub-

menu, a special measuring device is required. Usually,

leave these settings to their defaults, “Off.”

A notch ﬁlter cuts the signal of certain frequency ranges

and passes the rest of the signal through. Some

characteristics due to a room’s environmental elements,

including walls and smallness of the room, cause a

signal peak in certain low frequencies to occur

at the resonance frequency, resulting in a boomy sound.

The ﬁlter reduces the signal at these frequencies causing

the boomy sound.

To know which frequency the peak occurs at, use a low

frequency sine wave generator and SPL (Sound

Pressure Level) meter to check the frequency and the

notch value.

Notch Filter

Off (Default):

Select this setting when not applying the

notch ﬁlter.

On:

Select this setting when applying the notch ﬁlter.

Frequency

When setting “Notch Filter” above to “On,” the notch

ﬁlter becomes effective at the frequency you specify

here. With your measuring device, the frequency value

can be set at 1 Hz intervals in a range from 20 Hz to

300 Hz. The default is 100 Hz.

Speaker Crossover Sub-menu

Speaker Distance Sub-menu

Notch Filter Sub-menu

Speaker/Output Setup

—Continued

Depth

When setting “Notch Filter” above to “On,” the notch

ﬁlter becomes effective at the value you specify.

You can specify intervals of 0.5 dB in a range from

–15 dB to 0 dB. The default is –10 dB.

Width

The available setting values are calculated based on the

values speciﬁed in the “Frequency” and “Depth”

settings above. You can choose any values according to

your favorite sound.

Use this sub-menu to set the volume for each speaker so

that each volume is heard by the listener at the same

level. This is especially important for speaker layouts

where the left and right speakers are at different distances

or in asymmetrical positions due to room designs and

conﬁgurations. These settings and the distance settings

performed in the Speaker Distance sub-menu are vital for

creating proper sound space and dynamics. The settings

in the Level Calibration sub-menu can be conﬁgured for

both “Main A” and “Main B.”

• These settings cannot be made when the sound is

muted, when you connect the headphones, and when

you use multichannel playback.

• You cannot use the [Master Volume] dial while you

perform the Level Calibration settings. These settings

are intended to bring sound levels between speakers

into balance so as to obtain the proper sound space.

•

This unit supports the THX format and the test

tone is output at a standard 0 dB (the Absolute

Volume value is 82). If you usually enjoy listening

at a lower level than the test tone, be careful of the

test tone’s sudden loud sound.

Note that the test

tone will be output immediately after pressing the

[Enter] button in step 1 below.

1. When you display this setting screen, select “Level

Calibration,” and press the [Enter] button, the display

changes to the Level Calibration screen, and at the

same time, a sound is emitted from the front left

speaker.

2. Starting with the front speaker, press the [ ]/[ ]

buttons to select a speaker, and press the [ ]/[ ]

buttons to set the volume level. When you have set all

connected speakers, the setup is complete.

You can adjust in the range from –12 dB to +12 dB in

0.5 dB step. The subwoofer can be adjusted in the range

from –15dB to +12 dB in 0.5 dB step.

• For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not

Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, no

associated setting item is displayed.

• If “Surr Back is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, no item for

surround back speakers is displayed.

This is for setting up a home theater with a THX Ultra2

compliant speaker system. These settings will be

effective in the listening mode for the THX Ultra2

Cinema and THX Music Mode. The settings in the THX

Audio Setup sub-menu can be conﬁgured for both

“Main A” and “Main B.”

THX Ultra2 Subwoofer A/

THX Ultra2 Subwoofer B

This is for setting the connected subwoofer. Select

“Yes” or “No” according to your subwoofer’s

speciﬁcation.

Yes:

Set “Yes” if your subwoofer conforms to the THX

Ultra2 standard or if the playback capability of its bass

range extends down to 20 Hz. Otherwise, set “No.”

No (Default):

Set “No” if you use any subwoofer that

does not ﬁt the conditions above.

• For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not

Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, no

associated setting item is displayed.

Boundary Gain Compensation A/

Boundary Gain Compensation B

This is for setting the correction of boundary gains.

This item can be set when “THX Ultra2 Subwoofer” is

set to “Yes.”

Room boundaries (walls) or other characteristics (such

as construction materials) may increase the perceived

acoustics levels at low frequencies. Depending on the

listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener may

experience an excessive bass effect.

The purpose of this feature is to compensate for

excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect.

On:

Boundary Gain Compensation is applied.

Off (Default):

Boundary Gain Compensation is not

applied.

Level Calibration Sub-menu

THX Audio Setup Sub-menu

Setup Menu

Speaker/Output Setup

—Continued

Distance Between Surr Back A SP/

Distance Between Surr Back B SP

This setting is allowed only when “Main 2ch” is

selected from the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

Place two surround back speakers as close together as

possible, measure the distance, and set the value (see

the ﬁgure). The maximum effects will be realized by

THX’s ASA* technology.

0-1 ft (0-0.3 m)(Default):

This is the setting when the

distance between the speakers is 0-1 foot (0-30 cm).

1-4 ft (0.3-1.2 m):

This is the setting when the distance

between speakers is 1-4 feet (30 cm-1.2 m).

>4 ft (1.2 m):

This is the setting when the distance

between speakers is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more.

ASA:

Advanced Speaker Array

This setting allocates audio output jacks on the

RDC-7.1 to input (play) sources. The setting varies

depending on the connection conditions.

The RDC-7.1 is equipped with analog output jacks for

ﬁve lines, and digital output jacks: optical jacks (OPT)

for two lines, and coaxial jacks (COAX) for two lines. If

setting the analog jacks to “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3

Out,” you can also specify whether output should be

variable or ﬁxed.

The default settings are as follows:

Analog 1-5

Set the analog audio output jacks of “AUDIO OUT 1-5.”

You can select from Tape 1 Rec Out, Tape 2 Rec Out,

Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec Out, Video 3 Rec Out,

Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out, and Not Used.

Example 1:

When input (REC) of an audio recording device (e.g., a

cassette deck) with TAPE 1 as an input source is

connected to AUDIO OUT 1, set “Analog 1” to “Tape 1

Rec Out.”

Example 2:

When sound input of a picture recording device (e.g., a

VCR) with VIDEO 1 as an input source is connected to

AUDIO OUT 2, set “Analog 2” to “Video 1 Rec Out.”

Example 3:

When the ampliﬁer for Zone 2 is connected to AUDIO

OUT 5, set “Analog 5” to “Zone 2 Out.”

When nothing is connected:

Select “Not Used.”

Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out

This item is displayed when “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3

Out” is speciﬁed for Analog 1-5 above. The default

setting for “Zone 2 Out” is “Pre Out (variable)” and for

“Zone 3 Out” is “Line Out (ﬁxed).”

Pre Out (variable):

Select this when you want to set

“variable” for output to a device connected to Zone 2 or

Zone 3. You should operate the RDC-7.1 to adjust the

sound volume from the device in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Line Out (ﬁxed):

Select this when you want to set

“ﬁxed” for output to a device connected to Zone 2 or

Zone 3. You should operate the ampliﬁer connected to

the terminal to adjust the sound volume from the device

in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Audio Output Assign Sub-menu

Terminals Default input settings

Analog 1 (AUDIO OUT 1) Video 1 Rec Out

Analog 2 (AUDIO OUT 2) Video 2 Rec Out

Analog 3 (AUDIO OUT 3) Video 3 Rec Out

Analog 4 (AUDIO OUT 4) Zone 2 Out

Analog 5 (AUDIO OUT 5) Zone 3 Out

Opt 1 Out (DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1) Tape 1 Rec Out

Opt 2 Out (DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 2) Tape 2 Rec Out

Coax 1 Out (DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1) Video 1 Rec Out

Coax 2 Out (DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 2) Zone 2 Out

OUT

LR RL

AUDIO

Speaker/Output Setup

—Continued

Opt 1 Out, Opt 2 Out, Coax 1 Out, Coax 2 Out

Specify a setting for “DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2”

and “DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2.”

You can select from Tape 1 Rec Out, Tape 2 Rec Out,

Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec Out, Video 3 Rec Out,

Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out, and Not Used.

Example 1:

When input (REC) of an audio sound recording device

(e.g., an MD recorder) with TAPE 2 as an input source

is connected to DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1, set “Opt 1

Out” to “Tape 2 Rec Out.”

Example 2:

When input (IN) of a picture recording device (e.g., a

DVD recorder) with VIDEO 2 as an input source is

connected to DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 2, set “Opt 2

Out” to “Video 2 Rec Out.”

When nothing is connected:

Select “Not Used.”

HDMI Out

This sub-menu appears when the HDMI terminal board

[L] is inserted.

This setting allows you to enable/disable audio output

from the HDMI terminal. Use this setting when the

HDMI terminal of a TV is connected to the HDMI

terminal of the RDC-7.1 and you want to enable HDMI

audio output of the RDC-7.1 from the TV speakers.

Usually leave this setting to its default, “Disable.”

Disable (Default):

Disables HDMI audio output.

Enable:

Enables HDMI audio output.

This sub-menu appears when the video terminal board [H]

and [I] is inserted.

This setting allocates video output jacks on the

RDC-7.1 to input (play) sources. The setting varies

depending on the connection conditions.

The RDC-7.1 is equipped with composite video output

jacks for four lines, and S video output jacks for four

lines.

The default settings are as follows:

Composite Video 1-3, S-Video 1-3

This is a setting for the composite video output jacks

(VIDEO OUT 1-3) and S video output jacks (S VIDEO

OUT 1-3).

For Composite Video 1-3, you can select from Monitor

Out A, Monitor Out B, Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec

Out, Video 3 Rec Out, Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out, and Not

Used.

• You can set “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” only when

“Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” is selected from the

Audio Output Assign sub-menu.

For S Video 1-3, you can select from Monitor Out A,

Monitor Out B, Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec Out,

Video 3 Rec Out, and Not Used.

Example 1:

When the video port of a picture recording device (e.g.,

a VCR) with VIDEO 1 as an input source is connected

to VIDEO OUT 2, you should set “Composite Video 2”

to “Video 1 Rec Out.”

Example 2:

When you want to connect a TV set to VIDEO OUT 3

to watch it in main room A, set “Composite Video 3” to

“Monitor Out A.”

When nothing is connected:

Select “Not Used.”

Composite Video 4, S-Video 4

The composite video output jacks (VIDEO OUT 4), and

S video output jacks (S VIDEO OUT 4) are ﬁxed to

Monitor Out A, you cannot change this setting. You

should connect a TV set and a projector used in main

room A to VIDEO OUT 4 or S VIDEO OUT 4.

Video Output Assign Sub-menu

Terminals Default input settings

Composite Video 1 (VIDEO OUT 1) Monitor Out B

Composite Video 2 (VIDEO OUT 2) Zone 2 Out

Composite Video 3 (VIDEO OUT 3) Zone 3 Out

Composite Video 4 (VIDEO OUT 4) Monitor Out A (ﬁxed)

S-Video 1 (S VIDEO OUT 1) Video 1 Rec Out

S-Video 2 (S VIDEO OUT 2) Video 2 Rec Out

S-Video 3 (S VIDEO OUT 3) Video 3 Rec Out

S-Video 4 (S VIDEO OUT 4) Monitor Out A (ﬁxed)

OUT

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

Setup Menu

Input Setup

Items described here are set when you press the input source buttons.

The RDC-7.1 is equipped with several types of jacks in addition to the standard audio and video jacks, and multiple jacks

are provided for each type. You may freely assign input sources such as CD, PHONO, TUNER, TAPE 1, TAPE 2, and

VIDEO 1-6 to these jacks.

Moreover, you can preset a listening mode, specify names for display, adjust audio delays, correct the difference in the

volume level from other input sources, and set the 12V trigger.

In particular, please be careful when setting the input jacks. Please properly specify settings for correct selection of

pictures and audio to be played by referring to the information you wrote down in the Your System Setting booklet.

In the case of NET AUDIO, you can specify settings for the server (See page 99).

Settings defaults are as follows:

Note:

Defaults may differ depending on your region or option board in use.

USA: USA and Canadian models

OSD Indication Audio Assign Video Assign

Analog Audio Multichannel Digital Audio i.LINK Composite

Video S-Video Component

Video HDMI

Name of Terminal

to be Set AUDIO IN MULTI-CH

IN DIGITAL IN i.LINK VIDEO IN S VIDEO IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN HDMI IN

NET AUDIO

No No No No Last Last Last Last

1 No Opt 2 No Last Last Last Last

PHONO

Phono No No No Last Last Last Last

TUNER

No No USA: Coax 6

Others: No

No Last Last Last Last

TAPE 1

2 No Opt 3 No Last Last Last Last

TAPE 2

3 No Coax 1 No Last Last Last Last

DVD

4 1 Opt 1 No 1 1 RCA 1 HDMI 1

VIDEO 1

5 No Coax 2 No 2 2 RCA 2 HDMI 2

VIDEO 2

6 No Coax 3 No 3 3 RCA 3 Video

VIDEO 3

7 No Opt 4 No 4 4 RCA 4/BNC Video

VIDEO 4

8 No Opt 5 No 5 No No Video

VIDEO 5

9 No Coax 4 No 6 No No Video

VIDEO 6

No No Coax 5 No No 5 No Video

Input Selector

Input Setup

—Continued

Follow procedures below to change any setting:

Hint:

When you perform the procedures on the RDC-7.1,

after selecting the input source using the input source

buttons, press the [Setup] button. Next, select the menu

you want to conﬁgure by pressing the [ ]/[ ] buttons

and press the [Enter] button to conﬁrm the selection.

Then, after selecting the sub-menu you want to

conﬁgure by pressing the [ ]/[ ] buttons, select your

value by pressing the [ ]/[ ] buttons, and press the

[Enter] button to conﬁrm the value. If you want to go

back to the previous operation, press the [Exit] button.

Example 1

In assignment of a DVD recorder to input of VIDEO 1,

when the analog audio input is connected to “VIDEO

1,” the digital audio to “COAXIAL 2,” and the video to

“S VIDEO 2” and “COMPONENT 2.”

1. Press the [Input] button, and then roll the scroll

wheel to select “VIDEO 1.”

2. Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [Setup]

button to display the Main Menu.

3. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Input Setup,”

and then press the [Enter] button.

4. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Audio Assign”

from the sub-menu, and then press the [Enter] but-

ton.

5. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Analog Audio,”

and then use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “1.”

6. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Digital Audio,”

and then use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Coax 2.”

7. Press the [Return] button to return to the sub-menu.

8. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Video Assign,”

and then press the [Enter] button.

9. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “S-Video,” and

then use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “2.”

10. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Component

Video,” and then use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select

“RCA 2.”

11. Press the [Setup] button.

Setting is completed and the menu screen disap-

pears.

The following are settings for audio. When input is

“NET AUDIO,” see the following page.

Analog Audio

The following are settings for analog audio output:

Phono:

Select the device connected to “AUDIO IN

PH.”

1-9:

Select the device connected to the jack of “AUDIO

IN 1-9.”

No:

Select this when no device is connected.

Multichannel

This item appears when the multichannel terminal board

[E] is inserted. When the multichannel terminal board

contains a single set of multichannel terminals, available

options are “1” and “No.”

Select the device connected to the jack of “MULTI-

CH IN 1.”

Select the device connected to the jack of “MULTI-

CH IN 2.”

No (Default):

Select this when no device is connected.

Surr Back Channel

This item appears when the multichannel terminal board

[E] is inserted.

The following are settings for “Multichannel 1” or

“Multichannel 2” described above, and cannot be

speciﬁed separately for each input source. For example,

when the input source is CD and “Surround Back

Channel” is set to “Not Used (5.1 ch)” for

“Multichannel 1,” switching the input source to DVD

and “Surround Back Channel” to “SBL/SBR (7.1ch)”

will also change “Surround Back Channel” associated

with CD to “SBL/SBR (7.1ch).”

Not Used (5.1 ch):

Select this when not using the

surround back channel.

Press the [Input] button, and then roll the

scroll wheel to select the input source that

you want to set.

Press the scroll wheel, and then press the

[Setup] button.

The Main Menu appears onscreen.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Input

Setup,” and then press the [Enter] button.

The sub-menu is displayed.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an item

you want to set, and then use the [ ]/[ ]

buttons to set the desired value.

Other items should be selected in the same way.

Press the [Return] button.

The display returns to the sub-menu.

Repeat procedures 4-5 to set desired

items sequentially.

When all of the items are set, go to procedure 7.

Press the [Setup] button.

Settings are completed and the menu screen

disappears.

2.Input Setup

==Input:XXXXXX=======

1.Audio Assign

2.Video Assign

3.Listening Mode Preset

4.Character Edit

5.IntelliVolume

6.Delay

7.Picture Setting

8.12V Trigger Assign

Audio Assign Sub-menu (when input

is other than NET AUDIO)

Setup Menu

Input Setup

—Continued

SBL/SBR (7.1 ch) (Default):

Select this when using

the surround back channel.

Subwoofer Sensitivity

This item appears when the multichannel terminal board

[E] is inserted.

The following are also settings for “Multichannel 1” or

“Multichannel 2” (cannot be speciﬁed separately for

each input source).

Some DVD decks output the LFE channel at 15 dB

lower than the other channels in the multichannel

output.

The level setting under the Level Calibration sub-menu

is applied to the analog and digital inputs as well as the

multichannel input. Therefore, in this setting, you can

set the optimum LFE channel level applied only to the

multichannel input.

You can select from 0 (Default), +5, +10 and +15 dB.

Digital Audio

The following are settings for digital audio output.

Opt 1-Opt 6:

Select the device connected to “DIGITAL

IN OPTICAL 1-6.”

Coax 1-Coax 6:

Select the device connected to

“DIGITAL IN COAXIAL 1-6.”

AES/EBU:

Select the device connected to “DIGITAL

IN (BALANCED) AES/EBU.” The “AES/EBU” is

available when the board [E] equipped with AES/EBU

terminal is inserted.

No:

Select this when no device is connected.

Digital Format

For digital connections, you can set the digital signals to

be detected preferentially. When “Digital Audio” is set

to “No” on the Audio Assign Sub-menu above, this item

is not displayed.

Auto

: Automatically detects the format of input signals.

The signal format (Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM, AAC,

etc.) used for the selected source is automatically

detected, and necessary decoding is performed.

DTS:

Select for DTS decoding. You should select this if

you feel it takes too long to detect the signals when you

have selected “Auto,” or if you dislike noises caused by

CDs fast forwarding or rewinding.

If any sound other than DTS is input, there is no sound.

PCM:

Select for PCM decoding. You should select this

if you dislike omission of the top of a subsequent tune

when you have selected “Auto.”

If any sound other than PCM is input, there is no sound.

Note:

When playing any DTS-type CD or LD, always select

“Auto” and “DTS.” Selecting “PCM” will cause noises.

i.LINK

This item appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal

board [A] is inserted.

When you connect multiple devices using the

i.LINK(AUDIO) interface, the device names in the

i.LINK connection appear and you can choose the input

device from them using the cursor ([ ]/[ ]) buttons.

The device selected here will be the preferred device

among the connected i.LINK(AUDIO) devices.

No:

Select this when connected i.LINK(AUDIO)

devices are not selected as input devices.

This sub-menu appears when the ETHERNET terminal

board [B] (for Net Audio) is inserted.

Select Server

When input Music Server is selected from NET

AUDIO, you can specify a server to be connected (See

page 77).

The following are settings for video.

This sub-menu appears when the video terminal board [H]

and [I] is inserted.

Composite Video

1-6:

Select the device connected to the “VIDEO IN 1-

6” jack.

Last:

Select this when you want video signal from the

device you last selected to be output.

No:

Select this when no device is connected.

S-Video

1-6:

Select the device connected to the “S VIDEO IN 1-

6” jack.

Last:

Select this when you want video signal from the

device you last selected to be output.

No:

Select this when no device is connected.

Component Video

RCA 1-4:

Select the device connected to the

“COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1-4” jack. The “RCA 4” is

available when the video terminal board [J] contains the

RCA-type COMPONENT VIDEO IN 4 terminals.

BNC:

Select the device connected to the “COMPONENT

VIDEO IN” BNC type jack. The “BNC” is available

when the video terminal board [J] contains the BNC-type

COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals.

Last:

Select this when you want video signal from the

device you last selected to be output.

No:

Select this when no device is connected.

HDMI

This item appears when the HDMI terminal board [L] is

inserted.

Select the device connected to the “HDMI IN 1”

jack. When selecting this, the video signal from the

HDMI IN 1 terminal will also be output to the HDMI

OUT terminal.

Music Server Sub-menu (When input

is NET AUDIO)

Video Assign Sub-menu

100

Input Setup

—Continued

Select the device connected to the “HDMI IN 2”

jack. When selecting this, the video signal from the

HDMI IN 2 terminal will also be output to the HDMI

OUT terminal.

VIDEO:

Select this when you want the video signal

such as Composite Video, S Video, and Component

Video to be output from the HDMI OUT terminal.

Last:

Select this when you want video signal from the

device you last selected to be output.

No:

Select this when no device is connected.

You can specify a listening mode you frequently use for

each input source.

When a picture you like and frequently watch is a

Dolby Digital source, for example, you may specify

“Dolby Digital,” and if a CD of classical music you are

fond of is a PCM source, you can specify “Pure Audio.”

Selecting “Last” will set the same listening mode as the

one you last speciﬁed for that source.

• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not

Used” on the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the

option “PL IIx” is set to “PL II.”

• If “Surr L/R” is set to “Not Used” on the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu, you cannot select THX,

Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged,

Studio-Mix, or TV Logic.

• If both of “Center” and “Surr L/R” are set to “Not

Used” on the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, you

cannot select THX, Mono Movie, Enhance,

Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch

Stereo, or Full Mono.

Analog/PCM

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing

PCM signals from CDs and analog signals from records

and cassette tapes. This option can be set for Main B

and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo (Default), Mono, PL IIx/

NEO:6, THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,

Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full

Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

(Zone 2)

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Dolby Digital

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing

Dolby Digital signals. This option can be set for Main B

and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby Digital

(Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,

Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full

Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

(Zone 2)

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

DTS

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing

DTS signals. This option can be set for Main B and

Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, DTS (Default),

THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged,

Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono,

Dolby VS, and Last.

(Zone 2)

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

AAC

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing

AAC signals. This option can be set for Main B and

Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, AAC (Default),

THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged,

Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono,

Dolby VS, and Last.

(Zone 2)

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

i.LINK (IEEE1394):DVD-Audio

This item appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal

board [A] is inserted.

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing

DVD-Audio on a device connected to the

i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, DVD-Audio

(Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,

Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full

Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

i.LINK (IEEE1394):SACD

This item appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal

board [A] is inserted.

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing

Super Audio CD on a device connected to the

i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, SACD (Default),

THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged,

Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono,

Dolby VS, and Last.

D.F.2ch

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing

digital signals such as Dolby Digital recorded through

two channels. This option can be set for Main B and

Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

Listening Mode Preset Sub-menu

101

Setup Menu

Input Setup

—Continued

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono

PLIIx/NEO:6

(Default)

THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,

Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full

Mono

Dolby VS, and Last.

(Zone 2)

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

D.F. Mono

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing

digital signals such as Dolby Digital and AAC recorded

in monaural. This option can be set for Main B and

Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono (Default), Mono

Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix,

TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and

Last.

(Zone 2)

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

D.F. Multiplex

Here, you can specify the listening mode for AAC

sound multiplex broadcasting (e.g., a bilingual

broadcast). This option can be set for Main B and Zone

2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, Multiplex (Default),

Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-

Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS,

and Last.

(Zone 2)

Direct, Stereo, Mono, Multiplex, Dolby VS, and Last.

Multichannel

This item appears when the multichannel terminal board

[E] is inserted.

Here, you can specify the listening mode for analog

multichannel connection.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, Multichannel

(Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,

Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full

Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

176.4/192 kHz

Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing

audio output signals at 192 kHz and 176.4 kHz such as

DVD-Audio. This option can be set for Main B and

Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

You can select from the listening modes listed below:

(Main A/B)

Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Last

(Zone2)

Direct, Stereo, Last

Character Display

Specify whether or not the name given to an input

source should be displayed.

: The name given is not displayed. Only the name of

the input source is displayed.

Yes (Default)

: The name given is displayed when the

input source is replaced.

Character

When “Yes” is selected for “Character Display” above,

you can name the input source.

You are allowed to enter up to ten characters.

Carry out the following operations on the Character

Input screen:

To erase all the characters entered:

At step 1 above, press the [ ] button instead of the [ ]

button.

Character Edit Sub-menu

Press the [ ] button to select

“Character,” and then press the [ ]

button to display the Character Input

screen.

Press the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons to

select characters you want to enter, and

then press the [Enter] button.

Repeat step 2 above to enter up to ten

characters.

If you have selected the wrong character:

Pressing [Return] moves the cursor back to the

previous character.

To change a character:

1. Press the [Enter] button (repeatedly) to locate

the cursor on the character to be corrected.

2. Press the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select the new

character, and then press the [Enter] button.

If the name is shorter than ten characters, enter

blanks to make the length of the name ten

characters.

Press the [Setup] button.

Setup is complete, and the menu screen disappears.

123456789012345678901234

2-4.Character Input

Input:VIDEO3

b.Character

ABCDEFGHIJKLM

NOPQRSTUVWXYZ

abcdefghijklm

nopqrstuvwxyz

0123456789-.’

()+*/=,:;!?_

102

Input Setup

—Continued

When multiple devices are connected to the RDC-7.1,

the volume may vary for a device even when volume

settings on the RDC-7.1 are identical.

Reducing the variance in the volume level will allow

you to enjoy sounds at the same volume level without

adjusting the volume control on the RDC-7.1.

IntelliVolume

Use the [ ] button when the volume is louder than

other devices, and the [ ] button when the volume is

quieter.

You can set at 0.5 dB intervals within a range from

–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB. The default is 0.0 dB.

This section describes how to adjust the delay of

sounds.

A/V Sync

When the picture is not synchronized with the sound,

you can synchronize them using these settings. This

option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for

Main A.

You can set at 0.1 ms intervals within a range from

0.0 ms to 300.0 ms.

Relative Delay - Center, Surr L/R, Surr Back

Our proprietary “Enhanced Special Positioning

Algorithm” (an extended three-dimensional positioning

algorithm) ﬁne tunes the sound ﬁeld. This algorithm is

able to create a maximum delay of 10 ms in the output

of each speaker. This delay is equivalent to a distance of

about 3 meters between speakers. This option can be set

for both Main A and Main B.

• When “Center” is set to “Not Used” on the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu, there is no setting for

“Center.” Likewise, if “Surr L/R” is set to “Not

Used,” or “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front,”

or “Not Used,” there is also no setting for

corresponding speakers.

You can set at 0.1 ms intervals within a range from

–10.0 ms to +10.0 ms. The default is 0.0 ms.

Use this function to ﬁne tune your surround

environment after setting the distance between speakers

(See page 93) and the volume level (See page 94).

Extending the distance between speakers (widening the

delay in time) will expand the sound ﬁeld, while

reducing the distance (narrowing the delay) will make

the sound ﬁeld sharper.

When the 12V TRIGGER OUT jack on the RDC-7.1 is

connected to the 12V TRIGGER IN jack of a device,

you can specify the room where you are going to trigger

the device to turn on the power (for connection details,

see pages 47, 49).

The default settings are as follows:

Trigger A-E

The following are settings for the 12V trigger jacks A-

Off:

Select when not using.

Main:

Select when you want to power on a connected

device only used in the main room.

Zone 2:

Select when you want to power on a connected

device only used in Zone 2.

Zone 3:

Select when you want to power on a connected

device only used in Zone 3.

Main/Zone 2:

Select when you want to power on a

connected device only used in the main room or Zone 2.

Main/Zone 3:

Select when you want to power on a

connected device only used in the main room or Zone 3.

Zone 2/Zone 3:

Select when you want to power on a

connected device only used in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Main/Zone 2/Zone 3:

Select when you want to power

on a connected device used in any area: main room,

Zone 2, or Zone 3.

A delay-E delay

When a 12V trigger-connected device is powered on, a

large amount of current may, depending on the device

type, ﬂow instantaneously. To ease the effects of this

problem, you can set time interval differences for output

signals from the 12V Trigger.

Setting time interval differences may prevent

unnecessary noise (bubbling sounds).

0 sec:

Select when not setting any difference.

1 sec:

Select when setting output signals 1 second after

power on to the RDC-7.1.

2 sec:

Select when setting output signals 2 seconds after

power on to the RDC-7.1.

3 sec:

Select when setting output signals 3 seconds after

power on to the RDC-7.1.

IntelliVolume Sub-menu

Delay Sub-menu

12V Trigger Assign Sub-menu

Room setting Delay

Trigger A Main 0

Trigger B Zone 2 1

Trigger C Zone 3 2

Trigger D Off 0

Trigger E Main 2

103

Setup Menu

Listening Mode Setup

This menu allows you to conﬁgure the listening mode

settings including audio effect and playback options.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a source in the

Mono listening mode.

a. Re-EQ/Academy

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

or Academy effect is applied or not. Use these effects

when you do not want to overemphasize the treble

sound. This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Off (Default):

The effects are not applied.

Re-EQ On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble

is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

Academy On:

Lowers the treble level and ﬁlters the

noise when the source contains emphasized treble

sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio

movie recorded onto videotape.

b. Input Channel

This option conﬁgures the output method when you

play the stereo input source in the Mono listening mode.

This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Auto L+R (Default):

The same audio signals are output

from the left and right speakers.

Left:

When you play an input source with different

languages recorded on each channel, the left channel is

output from the left and right speakers.

Right:

When you play an input source where different

languages are recorded on each channel, the right

channel is output from the left and right speakers.

c. Output Speaker

This option conﬁgures the speakers to use when playing

the source in the Mono listening mode. Select the

speakers you want to use.

Center A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

center speaker conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Center B:

Outputs the source only from the center

speaker conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

Center A+B:

Outputs the source from the center

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

Front L/R A:

Outputs the source from the front

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Front L/R B:

Outputs the source from the front

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

Front L/R A+B:

Outputs the source from the front

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

Note that this option is not available when the front

speakers are in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

• When the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to an option

other than “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A,”

“Center B,” “Center A+B,” and “Front L/R A.”

• When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available

options will be “Front L/R A,” “Front L/R B,” and

“Front L/R A+B.” In this case, the default setting is

“Front L/R A.”

• When the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to an option

other than “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A,”

“Front L/R A,” “Front L/R B,” and “Front L/R A+B.”

• When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used”

and the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to an option

other than “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, this setting will not be displayed.

d. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when playing

the source in the Mono listening mode. Select the terminal to

which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This

setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is

set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B)

Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available options will

be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a source in the

D.F. Multiplex listening mode.

a. Re-EQ/Academy

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

or Academy effect is applied or not. Use these effects

when you do not want to overemphasize the treble

sound. This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Off (Default):

The effects are not applied.

Re-EQ On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble

is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

Academy On:

Lowers the treble level and ﬁlters the

noise when the source contains emphasized treble

sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio

movie recorded onto videotape.

Mono Setup Sub-menu

Multiplex Setup Sub-menu

104

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

b. Multiplex Input Channel

This option allows you to select the preferred audio

channel when the input is the AAC/Dolby Digital sound

multiplex signal. This option can also be set for Zone 2.

The input channel setting made here will be applied to

all the listening modes for the Dolby Digital and AAC

input signal “1+1” sources.

Main (Default):

The main channel is preferred for output.

Sub:

The sub-channel is preferred for output.

Main+Sub:

The main and sub-channel are output.

c. Output Speaker

This option conﬁgures the speakers to use when playing

the source in the D.F. Multiplex listening mode. Select

the speakers you want to use.

Center A:

Outputs the source only from the center

speaker conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Center B:

Outputs the source only from the center

speaker conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

Center A+B:

Outputs the source from the center

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

Front L/R A (Default):

Outputs the source from the

front speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Front L/R B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

Front L/R A+B:

Outputs the source from the front

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

Note that this option is not available when the front

speakers are in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

• When the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to an option

other than “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A,”

“Center B,” “Center A+B,” and “Front L/R A.”

• When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available

options will be “Front L/R A,” “Front L/R B,” and

“Front L/R A+B.” In this case, the default setting is

“Front L/R A.”

• When the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to an option

other than “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A,”

“Front L/R A,” “Front L/R B,” and “Front L/R A+B.”

• When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used”

and the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to an option

other than “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, this setting will not be displayed.

d. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source in the D.F. Multiplex listening mode.

Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to

use is connected. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than

“Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to

an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available options will be

“A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a source in the

Stereo listening mode.

a. Re-EQ/Academy

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

or Academy effect is applied or not in the Stereo

listening mode. Use these effects when you do not want

to overemphasize the treble sound. This option can also

be set for Zone 2.

Off (Default):

The effects are not applied.

Re-EQ On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble

is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

Academy On:

Lowers the treble level and ﬁlters the

noise when the source contains emphasized treble

sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio

movie recorded onto videotape.

b. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the speakers to use when playing

the source in the Stereo listening mode. Select the

speakers you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

c. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source in the Stereo listening mode. Select

the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is

connected. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than

“Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to

an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available options will be

“A” or “Not Used.”

Stereo Setup Sub-menu

105

Setup Menu

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This option defaults to “A.”

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a source in the

Direct or Pure Audio listening mode.

a. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening

mode. Select the speakers you want to use. This setting

can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to

“Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

b. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening

mode. Select the speaker you want to use. This setting

can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to

“Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

c. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio

listening mode. Select the speakers you want to use.

This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/

R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-

menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

d. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to

use when playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio

listening mode. Select the speakers you want to use.

This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr

Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back”

is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used,” this setting

will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and

“B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

e. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening

mode. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you

want to use is connected. This setting can be made when

the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other

than “Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an

option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not

Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play an analog

multichannel source such as DVD-Audio and Super

Audio CD.

This sub-menu appears when the multichannel terminal

board [E] is inserted.

a. SB Mode (5ch)

This option selects the enhancement mode for playback

when you play a 5.1ch analog multichannel source as a

6.1 or higher channel source through the RDC-7.1. The

surround back setting you select here will be applied to

all of the multichannel input signals.

• This option will not appear when the Surr Back

Channel setting in the Audio Assign sub-menu is set

to “SBL/SBR (7.1ch).”

Direct, Pure Audio Setup Sub-menu

Multichannel Input Setup Sub-menu

106

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for

Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-

menu, this option will not be displayed.

Dolby EX:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PL IIx Movie (Default):

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1

or higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Movie mode.

• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to

“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”

PL IIx Music:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

mode.

NEO:6:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Off:

Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

b. Re-EQ

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

effect is applied or not when playing an analog

multichannel source such as DVD-Audio and Super

Audio CD. Use this effect when you do not want to

overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default):

The effect is not applied.

On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is

overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

c. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

the RDC-7.1 plays an analog multi channel source such

as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD. Select the

speakers you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

d. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

the RDC-7.1 plays an analog multichannel source such

as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD. Select the speaker

you want to use. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

e. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when the RDC-7.1 plays an input source such as DVD-

Audio and Super Audio CD. Select the speakers you

want to use. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

f. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to use

when the RDC-7.1 plays an input source such as DVD-

Audio and Super Audio CD. Select the speakers you

want to use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker

B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker

A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not

Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and

“B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

g. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when the

RDC-7.1 plays an input source such as DVD-Audio and

Super Audio CD. Select the terminal to which the

subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting

can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set

to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker

B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”

in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available

options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

107

Setup Menu

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play DVD-Audio that is

input from the i.LINK(AUDIO) interface.

This sub-menu appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO)

terminal board [A] is inserted.

a. LFE Level

This option allows you to set the bass level for the

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio listening mode. The

LFE level setting made here will be applied to all of the

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio input signals. The

available settings are –

∞

dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, and 0 dB.

The option defaults to “0.”

b. SB Mode (5ch)

Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you

play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source

through the RDC-7.1. The surround back setting you

select here will be applied to the

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio input signal “*/2.”

• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp

for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.

Dolby EX:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PLIIx Movie:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie

mode.

• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to

“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”

PLIIx Music:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

mode.

NEO:6:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Off (Default):

Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

c. Re-EQ

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not

want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default):

The effect is not applied.

On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is

overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

d. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

the RDC-7.1 plays DVD-Audio. Select the speakers you

want to use. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

e. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

the RDC-7.1 plays DVD-Audio. Select the speaker you

want to use. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

f. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when the RDC-7.1 plays DVD-Audio. Select the

speakers you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

g. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to

use when the RDC-7.1 plays DVD-Audio. Select the

speakers you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when

the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for

Front” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu differ, the available options

will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio Input

Setup Sub-menu

108

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

h. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when the

RDC-7.1 plays DVD-Audio. Select the terminal to

which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This

setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer”

is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker

B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”

in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available

options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a Super Audio CD

input from the i.LINK(AUDIO) interface.

This sub-menu appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO)

terminal board [A] is inserted.

a. LFE Level

This option allows you to set the bass level for the

i.LINK(IEEE1394): SACD listening mode. The LFE

level setting made here will be applied to all of the

i.LINK(IEEE1394): SACD input signals. The available

settings are –

∞

dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, and 0 dB. The

option defaults to “0.”

b. SB Mode (5ch)

Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you

play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source

through the RDC-7.1. The surround back setting you

select here will be applied to the

i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD input signal “*/2.”

• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp

for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.

Dolby EX:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PLIIx Movie:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie

mode.

• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to

“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”

PLIIx Music:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

mode.

NEO:6:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Off (Default):

Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

c. Re-EQ

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not

want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default):

The effect is not applied.

On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is

overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

d. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

the RDC-7.1 plays a Super Audio CD. Select the

speakers you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

e. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

the RDC-7.1 plays a Super Audio CD. Select the

speaker you want to use. This setting can be made when

the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

f. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when the RDC-7.1 plays a Super Audio CD. Select the

speakers you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD Input Setup

Sub-menu

109

Setup Menu

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

g. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to

use when the RDC-7.1 plays a Super Audio CD. Select

the speakers you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when

the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for

Front” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu differ, the available options

will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

h. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when the

RDC-7.1 plays a Super Audio CD. Select the terminal

to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected.

This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A)

Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when

the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other

than “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu,

the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a source in the

Dolby Digital listening mode.

a. LFE Level

This option allows you to set the bass level for the Dolby

Digital listening mode. The LFE level setting made here

will be applied to all of the Dolby Digital input signals.

The available settings are –

∞

dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, and 0

dB. The option defaults to “0.” This option can also be

set for Zone 2.

b. Late Night

This option allows you to set how the Late Night

function works (See page 57). The setting you select

here will be applied to all of the Dolby Digital input

signals. Note that the Late Night setting will not be

retained and will return to “Off” after the RDC-7.1

enters the standby state. This option can also be set for

Zone 2.

Off:

Disables the Late Night function.

Low:

Narrows the volume range.

High:

Narrows the volume range more than the “Low”

setting.

c. Dolby EX

This option conﬁgures the Dolby EX effect when

playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode.

Auto:

Automatically plays a source using the Dolby EX

mode when the source contains the Dolby Digital EX

identiﬁcation signal. When this signal is not contained,

the setting of “SB Mode (5ch)” is applied.

Manual:

The setting of “SB Mode (5ch)” is applied

regardless of the Dolby Digital EX identiﬁcation signal.

d. SB Mode (5ch)

This option allows you to select the enhancement mode

for playback when you play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or

higher channel source through the RDC-7.1. The

surround back setting you select here will be applied to

the Dolby Digital input signal “*/2.”

• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp

for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu, this option will not be

displayed.

Dolby EX:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PLIIx Movie (Default):

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1

or higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Movie mode.

• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to

“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”

PLIIx Music:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

mode.

NEO:6:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Off:

Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

e. Re-EQ

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not

want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default):

The effect is not applied.

On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is

overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

Dolby Digital Setup Sub-menu

110

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

f. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode.

Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be

made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main

A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

g. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode.

Select the speaker you want to use. This setting can be

made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A”

in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

h. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening

mode. Select the speakers you want to use. This setting

can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to

“Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

i. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to

use when playing the source in the Dolby Digital

listening mode. Select the speakers you want to use.

This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr

Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back”

is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used,” this setting

will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu differ, the available options

will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

j. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode.

Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to

use is connected. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than

“Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to

an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available options will be

“A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a source in the

DTS listening mode.

a. LFE Level

This option allows you to set the bass level for the DTS

listening mode. The LFE level setting made here will be

applied to all of the DTS input signals. The available

settings are –

∞

dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, and 0 dB. The

option defaults to “0.” This option can also be set for

Zone 2.

b. SB Mode (5ch)

This option allows you to select the enhancement mode

for playback when you play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or

higher channel source through the RDC-7.1. The

surround back setting you select here will be applied to

the DTS input signal “*/2.”

• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp

for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.

NEO:6:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.

Dolby EX:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PLIIx Movie:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie

mode.

DTS Setup Sub-menu

111

Setup Menu

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to

“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”

PLIIx Music:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

mode.

Off:

Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

c. Re-EQ

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not

want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default):

The effect is not applied.

On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is

overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

d. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the

speakers you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

e. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the

speaker you want to use. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

f. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source in the DTS listening mode.

Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be

made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main

A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

g. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to

use when playing the source in the DTS listening mode.

Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be

made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main

A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu. However,

when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for

Front” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu differ, the available options

will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

h. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the

terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is

connected. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than

“Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to

an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available options will be

“A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a source in the

AAC listening mode.

a. LFE Level

This option allows you to set the bass level for the AAC

listening mode. The LFE level setting made here will be

applied to all of the AAC input signals. The available

settings are –

∞

dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, and 0 dB. The option

defaults to “0.” This option can also be set for Zone 2.

b. SB Mode (5ch)

Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you

play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source

through the RDC-7.1. The surround back setting you

select here will be applied to the AAC input signal “*/2.”

AAC Setup Sub-menu

112

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp

for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.

Dolby EX:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.

PLIIx Movie (Default):

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1

or higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Movie mode.

• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to

“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”

PLIIx Music:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

mode.

NEO:6:

Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel

source using the DTS NEO:6NEO:6 mode.

Off:

Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

c. Re-EQ

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not

want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default):

The effect is not applied.

On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is

overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

d. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select

the speakers you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

e. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select

the speaker you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

f. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source in the AAC listening mode.

Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be

made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main

A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

g. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to

use when playing the source in the AAC listening mode.

Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be

made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main

A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu. However,

when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for

Front” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu differ, the available options

will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

h. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select

the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is

connected. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than

“Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to

an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available options will be

“A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

113

Setup Menu

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a 2ch input source

in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS NEO:6 listening

modes. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A)

Center” or “(Speaker A) Surr Back” setting is set to an

option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp

for Front” or “Not Used,” the PLII mode will be used

instead of the PLIIx mode.

a. Surr Mode (2ch)

Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you

play a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source

through the RDC-7.1. The surround mode setting you

select here will be applied to the Analog/PCM and D.F.

2ch input signals.

• The option “NEO:6 Music” will be available when the

(Speaker A) Surr Back setting is set to “Main A” in the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

PLIIx Movie (Default):

Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or

higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Movie mode.

PLIIx Music:

Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

mode.

PLIIx Game:

Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

mode.

NEO:6 Cinema:

Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the DTS NEO:6 Cinema mode.

NEO:6 Music:

Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher

channel source using the DTS NEO:6 Music mode.

b. PLIIx Music Panorama

This option allows you to conﬁgure the panorama effect

during the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode. This effect

will expand the sound space horizontally.

On:

The panorama effect is turned on.

Off (Default):

The panorama effect is turned off.

c. PLIIx Music Dimension

This option allows you to change the entire sound space

location either forward or backward during the Dolby

Pro Logic IIx Music mode. The option defaults to “3.”

The value “3” locates the sound space to the center

position. If you select values between “2” and “0,” the

sound space moves backward. If you select values

between “4” and “6,” the sound space moves forward.

Tips:

When you feel the sound space is too expanded or that

there is too much surround effect, move the sound space

forward to obtain a better balance. When you feel the

sound space is just like a mono source or is too narrow,

move the sound space backward to obtain a better balance.

d. PLIIx Music Center Width

This option allows you to adjust the sound image width

which the center speaker covers during the Dolby Pro

Logic IIx Music mode. When you play the source in the

Dolby Pro Logic II mode and the center speaker is

connected to the RDC-7.1, the center channel signal is

output only from the center speaker (if the center

speaker is not connected, the center channel signal will

be equally divided into the left and right front speakers

to create a virtual center sound image). In this option,

adjust the output balance between the center and front

left/right speakers to determine the scale for the central

sound image. The available settings for this option are

between “0” and “7.” The default value is “3.”

e. NEO:6 Music Center Image

This setting can be made when the (Speaker A) Surr

Back setting is set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

The DTS NEO:6 Music mode is a listening mode in

which an original 2ch source is played as a 6ch source.

In this mode, the signal for center channel will be

created from the signals deducted to some extent from

the left and right front channels. This option allows you

to conﬁgure how much the signals are deducted from

the left and right channels to produce the center channel

image. The available settings for this option are

between “0” and “5.” The default value is “2.”

f. Re-EQ

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not

want to overemphasize the treble sound.

Off (Default):

The effect is not applied.

On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is

overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

g. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS

NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speakers you want to

use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)

Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx/DTS NEO:6 (2ch

Input only) Setup Sub-menu

114

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

h. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS

NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speaker you want to

use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)

Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

i. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or

DTS NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speakers you

want to use. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

j. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to

use when playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx

or DTS NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speakers you

want to use. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when the

“(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or

“Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu differ, the available options

will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

k. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS

NEO:6 listening modes. Select the terminal to which

the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This

setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer”

is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker

B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”

in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available

options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you apply the THX effect in

the THX mode. The settings in this sub-menu can be

made when the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting is set to

an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

a. Surround EX

This option conﬁgures the Surround EX effect.

Auto:

Automatically plays a source using the Surround

EX mode when the source contains the Dolby Digital

EX identiﬁcation signal. When the Dolby Digital EX

identiﬁcation signal is not contained and the signal is

from the multichannel source, the setting of “SB Mode

(5ch)” is applied. When the signal is from the 2ch

source, the setting of “SB Mode (2ch)” is applied.

Manual:

The setting of “SB Mode (5ch)” is applied

when the signal is from the multichannel source,

regardless of the Dolby Digital EX identiﬁcation signal.

When the signal is from the 2ch source, the setting of

“SB Mode (2ch)” is applied.

b.THX Mode (5ch)

This option allows you to select which THX mode the

RDC-7.1 will use when applying the THX effect to the

signal. The THX Mode you select here will be given

preference over the SB Mode (5ch).

• When the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting is “Main A

1ch” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the

available options will be “THX Cinema” and

“SurroundEX.”

THX Cinema:

This mode is suitable for theater movies

that are recorded and edited so that they are optimized

for playing in a large space such as a movie theater.

SurroundEX:

The RDC-7.1 automatically enters the

THX Surround EX playback mode.

Ultra2 Cinema (Default):

In this new mode for the

THX Ultra2, the RDC-7.1 plays a 5.1ch music or movie

as a 7.1 or higher channel source.

Music Mode:

This new mode for the THX Ultra2 is

suitable for a music source. In this mode, the RDC-7.1

plays a 5.1ch music source as a 7.1 or higher channel

source.

THX Setup Sub-menu

115

Setup Menu

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

Games Mode:

In this new mode for the THX Ultra2,

the RDC-7.1 plays a 5.1ch game source as a 7.1 or

higher channel source.

c. THX Mode (2ch)

This option allows you to select which THX mode the

RDC-7.1 will use when applying the THX effect to the

signal.

THX Cinema:

This mode is suitable for theater movies

that are recorded and edited so that they are optimized

for playing in a large space such as a movie theater.

Games Mode:

In this new mode for the THX Ultra2,

the RDC-7.1 plays a 2ch game source as a 7.1 or higher

channel source.

d. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

playing the source with the THX effect applied. Select

the speakers you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in

the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

e. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

playing the source with the THX effect applied. Select

the speaker you want to use. This setting can be made

when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

f. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source with the THX effect applied.

Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be

made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main

A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

g. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to

use when playing the source with the THX effect

applied. Select the speakers you want to use. This

setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back”

is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-

menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is

set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used,” this setting

will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu differ, the available options

will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

h. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source with the THX effect applied. Select

the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is

connected. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than

“Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to

an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available options will be

“A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a source in the

IntegraRESEARCH original listening mode. The

settings in this sub-menu can be made when the

(Speaker A) Surr L/R setting is set to an option other

than “Not Used” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-

menu.

Mono Movie Setup/Enhance Setup/

Orchestra Setup/Unplugged Setup/

Studio-Mix Setup/TV Logic Setup

Sub-menu

116

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

a. Front Effect

This option allows you to turn off the reverb for the

front speakers. This is useful when playing live material

that already contains live reverberation as the added

reverb simply blurs the original sound. When the Front

Effect is turned off, no reverb is added to the front left,

front right, and center speakers and the original

reverberation can be heard as it is.

On (Default):

The Front Effect is turned on and the

reverb is added.

Off:

The Front Effect is turned off.

b. Reverb Level

This option allows you to adjust the amount of reverb to

suit your listening environment, source material, and so

on. The available settings are Small, Mid, and Large.

The option defaults to “Mid.”

c. Reverb Time

This option allows you to adjust the reverb time to suit

your listening environment, source material, and so on.

The available settings are Short, Mid, and Long. The

option defaults to “Mid.”

d. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

playing the source. Select the speakers you want to use.

This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front

L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

e. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

playing the source. Select the speaker you want to use.

This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)

Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

f. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source. Select the speakers you want

to use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)

Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

g. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to use

when playing the source. Select the speakers you want to

use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr

Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back”

is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used,” this setting

will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu differ, the available options

will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

h. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source. Select the terminal to which the

subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting

can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set

to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker

B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”

in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available

options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the audio effect

and playback options when you play a source in the All

Ch Stereo or Full Mono listening modes. The settings in

this sub-menu can be made when the (Speaker A)

Center setting is set to an option other than “Not Used”

in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu.

All Ch Stereo Setup/Full Mono Setup

Sub-menu

117

Setup Menu

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

a. Re-EQ/Academy

This option allows you to conﬁgure whether the Re-EQ

or Academy effect is applied or not in the

IntegraRESEARCH original listening mode. Use these

effects when you do not want to overemphasize the

treble sound.

Off (Default):

The effects are not applied.

Re-EQ On:

Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble

is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for

home theater.

Academy On:

Lowers the treble level and ﬁlters the

noise when the source contains emphasized treble

sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio

movie recorded onto videotape.

b. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

playing the source. Select the speakers you want to use.

This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/

R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-

menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

c. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

playing the source. Select the speaker you want to use.

This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)

Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

d. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source. Select the speakers you want

to use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)

Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

e. Surr Bk Speaker

This option conﬁgures the surround back speakers to

use when playing the source. Select the speakers you

want to use. This setting can be made when the

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when the

“(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or

“Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.

• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and

“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu differ, the available options

will be “A” and “B.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround back speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround back

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

f. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source. Select the terminal to which the

subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting

can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set

to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker

B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”

in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available

options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

This sub-menu allows you to conﬁgure the playback

options when you use the Dolby Virtual Speaker effect.

a. Mode (2ch or 3ch only)

This option allows you to conﬁgure the width of a virtual

sound image which is simulated using two or three

speakers while you use the Dolby Virtual Speaker effect.

Wide:

The breadth of the sound image is emphasized.

Reference (Default):

The general 5.1ch surround

sound is simulated.

Dolby Virtual Speaker Setup

Sub-menu

118

Listening Mode Setup

—Continued

b. Front Speaker

This option conﬁgures the front speakers to use when

playing the source. Select the speakers you want to use.

This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front

L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the front speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that

this option is not available when the front speakers are

in Bi-amp conﬁguration.

c. Center Speaker

This option conﬁgures the center speaker to use when

playing the source. Select the speaker you want to use.

This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)

Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Conﬁguration

sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the center speaker

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the center speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

d. Surr L/R Sp

This option conﬁgures the surround speakers to use

when playing the source. Select the speakers you want

to use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)

Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu.

A (Default):

Outputs the source from the surround

speakers conﬁgured to “Speaker A.”

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker B.”

A+B:

Outputs the source from the surround speakers

conﬁgured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

e. Subwoofer

This option conﬁgures the subwoofer to use when

playing the source. Select the terminal to which the

subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting

can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set

to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker

B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”

in the Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, the available

options will be “A” or “Not Used.”

A (Default):

Outputs the source only from the

subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT

A terminal.

Outputs the source only from the subwoofer

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

A+B:

Outputs the source from the subwoofers

connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.

Not Used:

No subwoofers are used for playback.

In Zone 2, you can set the following options.

a. Mode

This option allows you to conﬁgure the width of a

virtual sound image which is simulated using two

speakers while you use the Dolby Virtual Speaker

effect.

Wide:

The breadth of the sound image is emphasized.

Reference (Default):

The general 5.1 ch surround

sound is simulated.

b. Decode (2ch)

This option allows you to select the decode mode before

the Dolby Virtual Speaker effect is applied.

Dolby Pro Logic II:

The Dolby Virtual Speaker effect

is applied after the signal is decoded with Dolby Pro

Logic II.

DTS NEO:6:

The Dolby Virtual Speaker effect is

applied after the signal is decoded with DTS NEO:6.

This sub-menu allows you to enable/disable the Dolby

Headphone function when you use the headphones.

a. Mode

On (Default):

Enables the Dolby Headphone function.

Off:

Disables the Dolby Headphone function.

Dolby Headphone Setup Sub-menu

119

Setup Menu

Audio Adjust

You can adjust bass, mid, and treble notes for each

speaker set.

• For any speaker set to “Not Used” in the Speaker

Conﬁguration sub-menu, no associated setting item is

displayed.

Front Bass

Option for adjusting bass notes from front L/R

speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Front Mid

Option for adjusting mid notes from front L/R speakers.

Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Front Treble

Option for adjusting treble notes from front L/R

speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

This option can also be set for Zone 2.

Center Bass

Option for adjusting bass notes from the center speaker.

Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Center Mid

Option for adjusting mid notes from the center speaker.

Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Center Treble

Option for adjusting treble notes from the center

speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Surr L/R Bass

Option for adjusting bass notes from surround L/R

speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Surr L/R Mid

Option for adjusting mid notes from surround L/R

speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Surr L/R Treble

Option for adjusting treble notes from surround L/R

speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Surr Bk Bass

Option for adjusting bass notes from the surround back

speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from –12

dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, this item is not

displayed.

Surr Bk Mid

Option for adjusting mid notes from the surround back

speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from –12

dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, this item is not

displayed.

Surr Bk Treble

Option for adjusting treble notes from the surround

back speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the

Speaker Conﬁguration sub-menu, this item is not

displayed.

Subwoofer Bass

Option for adjusting bass notes from the subwoofer.

Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from

–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Tone Control Sub-menu

120

Preference

This menu allows you to conﬁgure the listening mode settings including audio effects and playback options.

a. Volume Display

You can switch the volume indication between an

absolute value and a relative value.

Absolute (absolute value):

Displayed in a range from 0

to 100.

Relative (relative value) (Default):

Displayed in a

range of –

∞

dB, –81.5 dB, –80 dB......18.0 dB. An

absolute volume value of 82 is equivalent to a relative

volume value of 0 dB.

b. Muting Level

You can adjust the volume level of muted sounds.

Specify at 10 dB intervals in a range from –

∞

dB and

–50 dB to –10 dB. The default is “–

∞

.” This option can

be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

c. Maximum Volume

You can set the maximum output volume level to

prevent sounds from becoming too loud. When

displaying in absolute values, specify at 0.5 intervals in

a range from 50.0 to 99.5. When displaying in relative

values, specify at 0.5 dB intervals in a range from

–32 dB to +17.5 dB. If you do not want to set any

speciﬁc value, leave this item “Off,” the default setting.

This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as

for Main A.

d. Power On Volume

You can set a constant volume level of sounds output

when the RDC-7.1 is powered on. When displaying in

absolute values, specify at 0.5 intervals in a range from

0 to 100. When displaying in relative values, specify at

0.5 dB intervals in a range from –

∞

dB and –81.5 dB to

+18.0 dB (Max). If you want to maintain a selected

volume level setting when putting the apparatus into

standby status, select “Last.” This option can be set for

Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

a. Headphone Level

When the volume level differs between speakers and

headphones, you can, in advance, ﬁne tune the

headphones volume. Adjust at 0.5 dB intervals in a

range from –12 dB to +12 dB.

This sub-menu appears when the video terminal board

[H] and [I] is inserted.

a. Component Video

Specify whether or not to display the On Screen Display

(OSD) on the screen, when both of the source device

and TV/projector are connected to the component video

terminals. This option can be set for both Main A and

Main B.

OSD On (Default):

OSD is displayed.

OSD Off:

OSD is not displayed.

b. Immediate Display

Specify whether or not to display the description of

operations on the screen while you are operating the

RDC-7.1 (when the component video signal is output,

nothing is displayed if set to On). This option can be set

for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

On (Default):

Displayed.

Off:

Not displayed.

c. Display Position

Specify the position where the Immediate Display

should be displayed. You can set in a range of ten

positions from Top to Bottom of the screen. By default,

it is displayed at the Bottom of the screen. This option

can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

d. Scan Mode

Specify whether or not to output the video signal with

interlace mode.

Interlaced:

Outputs with interlace mode.

NonInterlaced:

Does not output with interlace mode.

e. Net-Tune OSD Display

This item appears when the ETHERNET terminal board

[B] (for Net Audio) is inserted.

Specify whether or not to display a description of

operations on the screen when using Net-Tune (when

the component video signal is output, nothing is

displayed if set to On). This option can be set for Main

B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

On (Default):

Displayed.

Off:

Not displayed.

This sub-menu allows you to adjust the position of the

OSD Setup Menu as it is displayed on your screen. This

sub-menu appears when the video terminal board [H]

and [I] is inserted. Depending on the monitor used,

there may be cases where the OSD Setup Menu is not

displayed in the center and parts of the menus are cut

off. To adjust the position of the OSD Setup Menu,

simply press the cursor buttons to inch the menu to the

position you desire. This option can be set for Main B

and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

Volume Setup Sub-menu

Headphone Level Setup Sub-menu

OSD Setup Sub-menu

OSD Position Sub-menu

121

Setup Menu

i.LINK Setup

This menu can be used when connecting to an IntegraRESEARCH i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device.

a. Wakeup on i.LINK (IEEE1394)

Specify connecting condition on standby of the

RDC-7.1.

Enable:

To be left connected.

Disable (Default):

To be disconnected while the

RDC-7.1 is on standby to save electricity.

a. OSD for DVD

Even when a DVD player is directly connected to the

TV, the OSD screen of the RDC-7.1 can be displayed on

the TV monitor if the DVD player is an

IntegraRESEARCH i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device. In

this case, use the i.LINK cable to connect the i.LINK

(AUDIO) terminal on the RDC-7.1 and i.LINK

(AUDIO) terminal on the DVD player.

Disable (Default):

Select this to block OSD screen

display.

Left:

Select this to display the OSD screen on the left

side of the TV monitor.

Right:

Select this to display the OSD screen on the

right side of the TV monitor.

b. Select DVD

Select the name of the device that should display the

OSD screen using the [ ]/[ ] cursor buttons if

multiple IntegraRESEARCH i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready

devices are connected to the RDC-7.1. This item does

not appear when “Disable” is selected in the OSD for

DVD setting.

When listening in Zone 2, the same setting as above is

available.

a. i.LINK Selector Change

This menu allows you to enable/disable the i.LINK

Selector Change function. When an i.LINK (AUDIO)-

enable device is used to playback, this function switches

the input source to the one assigned to the device.

Enable:

Enables the i.LINK Selector Change function.

Disable (Default):

Disables the i.LINK Selector

Change function.

b. DVD Output for Zone 2

This option automatically switches the i.LINK Audio

Output of IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo’s DVD players.

With this function enabled, audio signals of SACD will

be output through i.LINK when no source is selected

for Zone 2, or it will be output in analog format when

any source is selected for Zone 2.

Enable:

Enables the DVD Output for Zone 2 function.

Disable (Default):

Disables the DVD Output for Zone

2 function.

Wakeup Setup

OSD for DVD

OSD for DVD (Zone 2)

System Control Setup

122

Network Setup

This menu appears when the ETHERNET terminal board [B] (for Net Audio) is inserted.

If using a broadband router (DHCP function), you need not perform “7. Network Setup” because the DHCP function

on the RDC-7.1 is defaulted to “Enable.” When the DHCP function for the broadband router is set to “Disable,” network

setup is required. In this case, you have to be knowledgeable about the network.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol) and Auto IP

are the mechanisms that automatically perform network

settings such as IP address on a network device such as the RDC-7.1, a PC, and a broadband router.

DNS (Domain Name System)

is the mechanism that converts a domain name, such as “www.jp.onkyo.com/” used to

browse a homepage, to an IP address such as “210.199.170.69” used in actual communications.

a. DHCP Settings

Specify whether or not to set DHCP automatically.

Enable (Default):

Enables the DHCP function.

Disable:

Disables the DHCP function.

b. IP Address

Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.”

When an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is

connected directly to the RDC-7.1, enter the IP address

provided by your ISP. The IP address to be entered must

be in the following format. You cannot use the net audio

function with an IP address that is not in the following

format.

CLASS A:

10.0.0.0–10.255.255.255

CLASS B:

172.16.0.0–172.31.255.255

CLASS C:

192.168.0.0–192.168.255.255

c. SUBNET Mask

Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.”

When an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is

connected directly to the RDC-7.1, enter the subnet

mask provided by your ISP. The subnet mask is usually

“255.255.255.0.”

d. Gateway

Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.”

When an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is

connected directly to the RDC-7.1, enter the gateway

address provided by your ISP.

e. DNS Server 1, DNS Server 2

Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.”

When an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is

connected directly to the RDC-7.1, enter the DNS

address provided by your ISP. If connected to a gateway

(router), enter the IP address of the gateway.

When you are informed of a single DNS address, enter

the address into “e. 1st.” If informed of two or more,

enter one into “f. 2nd.”

Specify when connecting to the Internet via a proxy

server.

a. Proxy Server

Some ISPs (Internet service providers) use a proxy

server to connect to the Internet. In this case, follow the

written instructions from the provider to set the proxy.

Enable:

Enables the proxy server function.

Disable (Default):

Disables the proxy server function.

b. Proxy URL Input

Enter the domain name of the proxy server. When

“Disable” is set for “a. Proxy Server,” selecting this

item and pressing the [Enter] button will put the

RDC-7.1 into the character entry mode. Press the [ ]/

[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons to select numerics, and then

press the [Enter] button. When all numerics are entered,

exit from the character entry mode.

c. Proxy Port

Enter the port No. of the proxy server. When “Disable”

is set for “a. Proxy Server,” selecting this item and

pressing the [Enter] button will put the RDC-7.1 into

the character entry mode. Press the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]

buttons to select numerics, and then press the [Enter]

button. When all numerics are entered, exit from the

character entry mode.

Note:

When the settings are complete, press the [Return]

button to return to the Network Setup menu. Use the

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select “

→

Save Settings,” and then

press the [ ] button to save settings. After setting,

saving data will take a few seconds. While saving data,

be sure not to turn off the power, otherwise the data will

be lost.

a. MAC Address

Conﬁrm the MAC address of your PC. You cannot

change the MAC address.

IP Address Sub-menu Proxy Sub-menu

MAC

Address Sub-menu

123

Setup Menu

Network Setup

—Continued

While the system sending information is called a server,

the machine receiving the data is called a “client.”

Multiple clients can be connected to a single server.

From the viewpoint of Net-Tune Central, the RDC-7.1

is a client.

a. Client Name

Conﬁrm the client name used on the Net-Tune system.

The client name is assigned by the RDC-7.1. You

cannot change the assigned name.

b. Wakeup on LAN

Specify the network condition on standby of the

RDC-7.1.

Enable:

To be left connected.

Disable:

To be disconnected while the RDC-7.1 is on

standby to save electricity.

c. NTSP Port

Specify the TCP/IP port to communicate with Net-Tune

Central. This setting is to determine the port for

intercommunication and needs to match the setting at

Net-Tune Central. Do not change the port number

unless absolutely necessary. Press the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/

[ ] buttons to select numerics, and then press the

[Enter] button. When all numerics are entered, exit from

the character entry mode.

Note:

When the settings are complete, press the [Return]

button to return to the Network Setup menu. Use the

[ ]/[ ] buttons to select “

→

Save Settings,” and then

press the [ ] button to save settings described in

“Network Setup” on pages 122 and 123. After setting,

saving data will take a few seconds. While saving data,

be sure not to turn off the power, otherwise the data will

be lost.

Speciﬁcations:

Ethernet port: 10BASE-T

File type: MP3, WMA, WAV

(supports non-compression format and sampling

frequency of 32, 44.1, 48 kHz)

(WMA ﬁles with contents protected cannot be played)

Lock/Version Setup

The following sub-menus allow you to lock your

settings or display the software version of the RDC-7.1.

a. Lock

You can lock all of the setting menus to prevent settings

from being changed by mistake.

Locked:

Powering on and off will resume the setting

when it was locked, discarding any modiﬁcation that

was made after locking.

Unlocked (Default):

No lock on setting operations.

This section deals with conﬁrmation of the ﬁrmware

version for each program currently installed in your

RDC-7.1 (No procedure is provided for updating the

ﬁrmware).

a. Master version

Conﬁrm the ﬁrmware version for the main program.

b. i.LINK(IEEE1394) version

Conﬁrm the ﬁrmware version for i.LINK. This item

appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal board [A] is

inserted.

c. Net-Tune version

Conﬁrm the ﬁrmware version for the Net-Tune

program. This item appears when the ETHERNET

terminal board [B] (for Net Audio) is inserted.

d. HDMI version

Conﬁrm the ﬁrmware version for HDMI. This item

appears when the HDMI terminal board [L] is inserted.

Client Sub-menu

Lock Setup Sub-menu

Firmware Version Sub-menu

124

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo Products

Using the Remote Controller

The RC-554M/555M remote controller is a useful tool

that can operate not only the RDC-7.1, but also all the

other components of your home theater. To operate any

component other than the RDC-7.1 with the RC-554M/

555M remote controller, press the [Mode] button and use

the scroll wheel to select the component to operate.

Before operating a digital component including satellite

tuner, cable TV, VCR, and TV with the RC-554M/555M,

you need to program the remote control codes of the oper-

ated digital component into the RC-554M/555M.

There are two methods. One method is selecting the

name of a different brand from the table, entering the

setting number listed, and calling up the pre-program-

ming code (See page 130). The other method is sending

the commands from the other brand’s remote control

directly into this remote controller (See page 136).

Connecting your -compatible IntegraRESEARCH/

Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, DVD player, or cassette

recorder to the RDC-7.1 via allows you to control

your system with the RDC-7.1’s remote controller by

pointing it at the RDC-7.1. Since you don’t have to enter

any special codes, or do any programming, allows

you to control these components quickly and easily. See

page 45 for connection information.

Note:

To use the function, you must make an connec-

tion and an analog RCA/phono connection between the

AV component and your RDC-7.1, even if they are con-

nected digitally.

DVD mode is used to control an IntegraRESEARCH/

Onkyo DVD player connected to the RDC-7.1 via .

To select DVD mode, press the [Mode] button, and

then roll the scroll wheel until “DVD” appears on the

display.

Note:

While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is

illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input

source and remote controller mode simultaneously

(when you enter the DVD mode, be sure that the LCD

display shows “DVD” in both of the top and bottom

lines).

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo

Products Using the Connection

Press the [Mode] button.

Roll the scroll wheel to select your favor-

ite mode.

• When operating the IntegraRESEARCH/

Onkyo DVD player, select “DVD.”

• When operating the Onkyo CD player, select

“CD.”

• When operating the Onkyo MD player, select

“MD.”

• When operating the Onkyo cassette tape deck,

press the scroll wheel to display “AMP.”

Point the remote controller toward the

front panel of the RDC-7.1, and press the

appropriate buttons for your operation.

DVD Mode

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

125

Using the Remote Controller

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo Products Using the Remote

Controller

—Continued

On button

This button is used to turn on the DVD player.

Standby button

This button is used to set the DVD player to Standby.

Number/letter buttons

These buttons are used to enter title, chapter, and

track numbers and to enter times for locating spe-

ciﬁc points in time.

Mode button

This button is used with the scroll wheel to select

the remote controller modes. Press this button ﬁrst,

and then roll the scroll wheel until “DVD” appears

on the display.

Top Menu button

This button is used to select a DVD’s top menu.

Up/Down/Left/Right [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] &

Enter buttons

These buttons are used to navigate DVD menus and

the DVD player’s onscreen setup menus. The

[Enter] button is used to start playback of the

selected menu title, chapter, or track and to conﬁrm

settings.

CH/Disc +/– button

This button is used to select discs on a DVD changer.

Return/Exit button

This button is used to exit the DVD player’s

onscreen setup menu and to restart menu playback.

Display button

This button is used to display information about the

current disc, title, chapter, or track, including the

elapsed time, remaining time, total time, and so on.

Previous/Next [ ]/[ ] buttons

The Previous [ ] button is used to select the pre-

vious chapter or track. During playback it selects

the beginning of the current chapter or track. The

Next [ ] button is used to select the next chapter

or track.

FR/FF [ ]/[ ] buttons

The FR [ ] button is used to start fast reverse.

The FF [ ] button is used to start fast forward.

Pause [ ] button

This button is used to pause DVD playback.

Step/Slow [ ]/[ ] buttons

These buttons are used for frame-by-frame play-

back and slow-motion playback.

Subtitle button

This button is used to select subtitles.

Audio button

This button is used to select foreign language

soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital

or DTS).

Repeat button

This button is used to set the repeat playback func-

tions.

A-B button

This button is used to set the A–B repeat playback

function.

Open/Close [ ] button

This button is used to open and close the disc tray.

LIGHT button

This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-

troller’s illuminated buttons.

Clear button

This button is used to cancel functions and to clear

entered numbers.

Input button

This button is used to select the input source. Press

this button ﬁrst, and then roll the scroll wheel until

“DVD” appears on the display.

Menu button

This button is used to select a DVD’s menu.

VOL button

This button is used to set the volume of the

RDC-7.1.

Setup/Guide button

This button is used to access the DVD player’s

onscreen setup menus.

Muting button

This button is used to mute the RDC-7.1. This func-

tion can be set only with the remote controller.

Play [ ] button

This button is used to start DVD playback.

Stop [ ] button

This button is used to stop DVD playback.

Random button

This button is used with the random playback func-

tion.

Angle button

This button is used to select different camera angles.

Last Memory button

This button is used with the last memory function,

which allows you to resume DVD playback from

where you left off.

Memory button

This button is used with the memory playback func-

tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of

titles, chapters, or tracks.

Search button

This button is used to search for titles, chapters,

tracks, and speciﬁc points in time.

126

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller

—

Continued

CD mode is used to control an Onkyo CD player con-

nected to the RDC-7.1 via .

To select CD mode,

press the [Mode] button, and then roll the scroll

wheel until “CD” appears on the display.

Note:

While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is

illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input

source and remote controller mode simultaneously

(when you enter the CD mode, be sure that the LCD

display shows “CD” in both of the top and bottom

lines).

Boxed numbers are for MiniDisc mode (See page 127).

On button

This button is used to set the CD player to On or

Standby.

Number/letter buttons

These buttons are used to enter track numbers.

Mode button

This button is used with the scroll wheel to select

the remote controller modes. Press this button ﬁrst,

and then roll the scroll wheel until “CD” appears on

the display.

CH/Disc +/– button

This button is used to select discs on a CD changer.

Display button

This button is used to display information about the

current disc or track, including the elapsed time,

remaining time, total time, and so on.

Previous/Next [ ]/[ ] buttons

The Previous [ ] button is used to select the pre-

vious track. During playback it selects the begin-

ning of the current track. The Next [ ] button is

used to select the next track.

FR/FF [ ]/[ ] buttons

The FR [ ] button is used to start fast reverse.

The FF [ ] button is used to start fast forward.

Pause [ ] button

This button is used to pause CD playback.

Repeat button

This button is used to set the repeat playback func-

tions.

Open/Close [ ] button

This button is used to open and close the disc tray.

LIGHT button

This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-

troller’s illuminated buttons.

Clear button

This button is used to cancel functions and to clear

entered numbers.

Input button

This button is used to select the input source. Press

this button ﬁrst, and then roll the scroll wheel until

“CD” appears on the display.

VOL button

This button is used to set the volume of the

RDC-7.1.

Muting button

This button is used to mute the RDC-7.1. This func-

tion can be set only with the remote controller.

CD Mode

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

127

Using the Remote Controller

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller

—

Continued

Play [ ] button

This button is used to start CD playback.

Stop [ ] button

This button is used to stop CD playback.

Random button

This button is used with the random playback func-

tion.

Memory button

This button is used with the memory playback func-

tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of

tracks.

MiniDisc mode is used to control an Onkyo MiniDisc

recorder connected to the RDC-7.1 via .

To select

MiniDisc mode, press the [Mode] button, and then

roll the scroll wheel until “MD” appears on the dis-

play.

Note:

While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is

illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input

source and remote controller mode simultaneously

(when you select “TAPE2” as the top line, “MD”

appears in the bottom line.)

On button

This button is used to set the MiniDisc recorder to

On or Standby.

Number/letter buttons

These buttons are used to enter track numbers and

to enter times for locating speciﬁc points in time.

Mode button

This button is used with the scroll wheel to select

the remote controller modes. Press this button ﬁrst,

and then roll the scroll wheel until “MD” appears

on the display.

Display button

This button is used to display information about the

current disc or track, including the elapsed time,

remaining time, total time, and so on.

Previous/Next [ ]/[ ] buttons

The Previous [ ] button is used to select the pre-

vious track. During playback it selects the begin-

ning of the current track. The Next [ ] button is

used to select the next track.

FR/FF [ ]/[ ]buttons

The FR [ ] button is used to start fast reverse.

The FF [ ] button is used to start fast forward.

Pause [ ] button

This button is used to pause MiniDisc playback.

Rec [

●

] button

This button is used to start MiniDisc recording.

Repeat button

This button is used to set the repeat playback func-

tions.

Eject [ ] button

This button is used to set eject the MiniDisc.

LIGHT button

This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-

troller’s illuminated buttons.

Clear button

This button is used to cancel functions and to clear

entered numbers.

Input button

This button is used to select the input source. Press

this button ﬁrst, and then roll the scroll wheel until

“TAPE2” appears on the display.

VOL button

This button is used to set the volume of the

RDC-7.1.

Muting button

This button is used to mute the RDC-7.1. This func-

tion can be set only with the remote controller.

FPlay [ ] button

This button is used to start MiniDisc playback.

GStop [ ] button

This button is used to stop MiniDisc playback.

HRandom button

This button is used with the random playback func-

tion.

IMemory button

This button is used with the memory playback func-

tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of

tracks.

MiniDisc Mode

128

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller

—

Continued

Tape mode is used to control an Onkyo cassette

recorder connected to the RDC-7.1 via .

To select

Tape mode, press the scroll wheel, placing your

remote controller into “AMP” mode

Note:

While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is

illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input

source and remote controller mode simultaneously

(when you select “TAPE1” as the top line, “AMP”

appears in the bottom line.).

Mode button

This button is used with the scroll wheel to select

the remote controller modes. Press the scroll wheel

until “AMP” appears on the display.

Previous/Next [ ]/[ ] buttons

The Previous [ ] button is used to select the pre-

vious track. During playback it selects the begin-

ning of the current track. The Next [ ] button is

used to select the next track.

The Previous/Next [ ]/[ ] buttons may not

work properly with some cassette tapes depending

on how they were recorded.

Rewind/FF [ ]/[ ] buttons

The Rewind [ ] button is used to start rewind.

The FF [ ] button is used to start fast forward.

Rec [

●

]

button

This button is used to start tape recording.

LIGHT button

This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-

troller’s illuminated buttons.

Input button

This button is used to select the input source. Press

this button ﬁrst, and then roll the scroll wheel until

“TAPE1” appears on the display.

VOL button

This button is used to set the volume of the

RDC-7.1.

Muting button

This button is used to mute the RDC-7.1. This func-

tion can be set only with the remote controller.

Play [ ] button

This button is used to start tape playback.

Stop [ ] button

This button is used to stop tape playback.

Reverse Play [ ] button

This button is used to start reverse playback.

Tape Mode

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

129

Using the Remote Controller

Using the Remote Controller with Other

Components

You can use the RDC-7.1’s remote controller (RC-

554M/555M) to control your other AV components,

including those made by other manufacturers. To do this

you can:

• Enter a remote control code for the component that

you want to control (e.g., DVD, TV, VCR).

• Learn commands directly from the other component’s

remote controller (see page 136).

• Use the Macro function to learn a sequence of actions

(see page 137).

By entering the appropriate remote control code for

each of your components, you can control each compo-

nent by selecting the relevant remote controller mode:

DVD, TV, VCR, CBL (cable), or SAT (satellite).

Remote Control Codes for an

IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo DVD player

The remote control code that you use with an

IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo DVD player depends on

whether it’s connected via , as follows:

5001:

Use this code if you’ve connected an cable

and an RCA/phono analog audio connection cable to

your DVD player. This is the default setting, so if

you’re using , you don’t need to change it. Point

the remote controller at the RDC-7.1 to operate the

DVD player.

5002:

Use this code if your DVD player doesn’t have

an socket, or you’re not using . Point the

remote controller at the DVD player to operate it.

Entering a Remote Control Code

Look up the appropriate remote

control code for the component.

See “Remote Control Codes” on pages

130-133.

Press and hold down the [Custom]

button for more than three sec-

onds.

The remote controller enters Custom

mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“PRGRM,” and then press the

scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the

the remote controller mode you

want to use with the component,

and then press the scroll wheel.

The following remote controller modes

can be selected: DVD, TV, VCR, CBL,

or SAT.

Custom

Use the number buttons to enter

the 4-digit remote control code.

If the code is accepted,

the following

appears on the display for a while, and

then the normal display reappears.

If the code is not accepted,

after the

message “RETRY” has been displayed,

the code entry display reappears, and

you should try entering the code again.

To cancel this procedure at any point,

press the [Custom] button.

Select the remote controller mode,

point the remote controller at the

component, and check its opera-

tion.

The remote controller buttons that can

be used in DVD mode are shown on

page 124. Those that can be used with

the TV, VCR, CBL, and SAT modes are

listed on pages 134 and 135.

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

@.-'/

123

456

789

130

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components

—Continued

Remote Control Codes

When two or more codes are given,

try each one in turn, and choose the

one that works best.

DVD (DVD player)

Manufacturer Control code

Aiwa 5010

Akai 5019

Apex 5015, 5016

CyberHome 5027

Denon 5017, 5020

GE 5003

Hitachi 5009

Integra 5001, 5002

Integra Research 5001, 5002

JVC 5023

Kenwood 5017

Magnavox 5004, 5021

Marantz 5025, 5026

Mitsubishi 5005

Onkyo 5001, 5002

Panasonic 5011, 5017, 5020

Philips 5004, 5021, 5028

Pioneer 5006

Proscan 5003

RCA 5003

Sanyo 5012

Sony 5007, 5013, 5018,

5029

Technics 5020

Thomson 5022, 5024

Toshiba 5008, 5021

Xbox 5022

Yamaha 5020

Zenith 5014, 5021

SAT (satellite tuner)

Manufacturer Control code

Alba 4014, 4017, 4025,

4027

Allsat 4015, 4027

Alltech 4022, 4025

Amstrad 4013, 4019, 4025,

4030, 4031

Anglo 4025

Ankaro 4025

Anttron 4017

Apollo 4017

Arcon 4016

Armstrong 4013

Asat 4016

Astra 4013, 4016, 4024

Astro 4019, 4020

AudioTon 4015

Bush 4012, 4014

Condor 4024

Conrad 4024

Cosat 4015, 4023

Crown 4013

Daewoo 4016, 4017, 4025

Diamond 4022

Dishnet 4008

Dual 4016

Echostar 4010, 4018, 4025

Einhell 4013, 4017, 4025

Elta 4015, 4017

Engel 4025

Eurosat 4013, 4022

Eurosky 4013, 4024

Eurostar 4024

Fagor 4015, 4023

Ferguson 4012

Fidelity 4030

Fracarro 4017

FTE 4025, 4030

Fuba 4017

Galaxis 4015, 4023

GE 4001, 4002

General Instruments 4003

GMI 4013

Grundig 4021, 4029, 4031

Hinari 4017

Hirschmann 4019, 4035

Hitachi 4036, 4037

Hughes Network

Systems 4011

Huth 4013, 4015, 4024

Imperial 4014

Intertronic 4013

Intervision 4015, 4023, 4024

Johansson 4015

JVC 4009, 4021

Kathrein 4025

Kolon 4017

K-SAT 4025

Kyostar 4017

Lasat 4013, 4020, 4024

Lenco 4016, 4017, 4025

Lennox 4023

Loewe 4013

Lorenzen 4024

Macab 4022

Manhattan 4015, 4020, 4023

Maspro 4021, 4025

Matsui 4021

Mediamarkt 4013

Medion 4025

Metronic 4013, 4017, 4020

Micro Technology 4025

Minerva 4021

Morgan’s 4013, 4015, 4025

Mysat 4025

Neuhaus 4019, 4023, 4024,

4025

Neusat 4025

Nikko 4013, 4025, 4027

Nokia 4033

Nordmende 4017, 4020

SAT (satellite tuner)

Manufacturer Control code

Oceanic 4022

Octagon 4016, 4017

Okano 4013

Optex 4015, 4023

Orbit 4016

Orbitech 4017, 4019

Pace 4012, 4026, 4031

Paciﬁc 4022

Palladium 4013, 4017, 4021

Palsat 4019

Panasonic 4006, 4031

Panda 4024

Philips 4021, 4029

Phonotrend 4015, 4023

Predki 4017

Premier 4023

Primestar 4007

Proscan 4001, 4002

Protek 4022

Pye 4021

Quelle 4024

Radix 4035

RCA 4001, 4002

Roadster 4025

Rover 4025

Saba 4014, 4020, 4024,

4027

Samsung 4017

Satcom 4024

SatPartner 4017, 4020, 4027,

4030

Schneider 4029

Sedea Electronique 4017

Seemann 4013

SEG 4017, 4028

Seleco 4015, 4023

Skymaster 4025, 4034

Skyvision 4015

Sony 4005, 4031

Strong 4016, 4017, 4020

Sunstar 4013

Techniland 4015, 4023

TechniSat 4019

Teco 4013, 4016

Teleciel 4027

Telefunken 4017

Teleka 4013

Telemaster 4020

Telewire 4015, 4023

Tensai 4016

Thomson 4024, 4025

Thorens 4022

Tonna 4015, 4023, 4025

Toshiba 4004

Triasat 4019

Tristar 4016

Unisat 4013

SAT (satellite tuner)

Manufacturer Control code

131

Using the Remote Controller

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components

—Continued

SAT (satellite tuner)

Manufacturer Control code

Universum 4021, 4024

Vortec 4017

Wela 4025

Zehnder 4020

Zenith 4032

CBL (cable receiver)

Manufacturer Control code

ABC 3001, 3002, 3021

Archer 3006

Cabletime 3028, 3032

Cableview 3004

Contec 3009

Eastern 3010

GE 3001, 3002

Gemini 3011

General Instruments 3002, 3022

Grundig 3031

Hamlin 3012

Hitachi 3002

Jerrold 3002, 3011, 3013, 3021,

3022, 3023, 3026

Magnavox 3014

Memorex 3015

Movie Time 3016

NEC 3003

Nokia 3033

NSC 3016

Oak 3009

Panasonic 3020

Philips 3007, 3008, 3014

Pioneer 3017, 3024

Proscan 3001, 3002

RCA 3004, 3020, 3022

Realistic 3006

Sagem 3034

Salora 3029

Samsung 3017

Signature 3002

Sprucer 3020

Standard

Component 3018

Starcom 3011, 3021

Stargate 3011

Tele+1 3030

Tocom 3013

United Cable 3021, 3023

Universal 3005, 3006

Videoway 3025

View Star 3009, 3014, 3016

Zenith 3019

VCR

Manufacturer Control code

Aiwa 2012, 2046, 2047

Akai 2003, 2004, 2022

Alba 2033, 2041, 2044, 2045,

2047

Anitech 2033

ASA 2034

Baird 2036

Bell & Howell 2007

Blaupunkt 2039, 2042

Bush 2033, 2041, 2044, 2045,

2047

Canon 2010, 2011

Carver 2014

Cimline 2033

Citizen 2008, 2009

Colortyme 2005

Craig 2008

Crown 2033

Curtis Mathes 2001, 2005, 2008, 2009,

2010, 2011, 2023, 2026

Cyrus 2034

Daewoo 2012

Dansai 2033

Decca 2034

Dimensia 2001, 2026

Dumont 2034, 2036, 2037

Elcatech 2033

Emerson 2003, 2010, 2012, 2022

ESC 2043

Ferguson 2035

Finlandia 2034, 2036

Finlux 2034, 2036, 2037

Firstline 2033, 2041

Fisher 2007, 2030, 2036

Fuji 2004, 2010, 2024

Funai 2012

Garrard 2012

GE 2001, 2002, 2008, 2010,

2011, 2023, 2025, 2026

GEC 2034

GoldHand 2033

GoldStar 2005, 2009

Goodmans 2031, 2033

Gradiente 2012

Graetz 2036, 2043

Granada 2030, 2034, 2036

Grandin 2033

Grundig 2029, 2033, 2034, 2039,

2040, 2042, 2044

Harman Kardon 2005

HCM 2033, 2044

Hinari 2028, 2033, 2043, 2044,

2047

Hitachi 2013, 2021, 2025, 2028,

2037, 2038, 2043

Ingersol 2028

Interfunk 2034

ITT 2030, 2036, 2043, 2048

JC Penney

2005, 2006, 2007, 2008,

2010, 2011, 2013, 2014,

2021

Jensen 2013

JVC 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009,

2032, 2035, 2040, 2048

Kaisui 2033

Kendo 2041, 2046

Kenwood 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009

Kodak 2010

Loewe 2028, 2034

Logik 2028, 2043

Luxor 2030, 2031, 2036

Magnavox 2010, 2011, 2014, 2019,

2020

Marantz 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009,

2010, 2014, 2031, 2034

Matsui 2028, 2041, 2046, 2047

Matsushita 2010

Memorex 2007, 2008, 2010, 2012,

2019, 2030, 2036

Metz 2039

MGA 2022

Minerva 2039

Minolta 2013, 2021

Mitsubishi 2013, 2022, 2032, 2034

Motorola 2010

MTC 2008

Multitech 2008, 2012, 2033

NEC 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009,

2032

Neckermann 2034

Nesco 2033

NOBLEX 2008

Nokia 2030, 2036, 2043

Nordmende 2048

Okano 2046

Olympus 2010

Optonica 2017

Orion 2028, 2041, 2045, 2046,

2047

Osaki 2033

Otto Versand 2034

Palladium 2033

Panasonic 2010, 2011, 2042

Pentax 2013, 2021, 2025, 2037

Pentex Research 2009

Philco 2010, 2011, 2014

Philips 2010, 2014, 2017, 2034,

2048

Phonola 2034

Pioneer 2006, 2013, 2032, 2034

Proline 2044

Proscan 2001, 2002, 2026

Pye 2034

Quasar 2010, 2011

Quelle 2034

Radio Shack 2017

Radio Shack/

Realistic

2007, 2008, 2010, 2011,

2012, 2017

Radiola 2034

VCR

Manufacturer Control code

132

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components

—Continued

VCR

Manufacturer Control code

RCA

2001, 2002, 2003, 2008,

2010, 2013, 2021, 2023,

2025, 2026, 2027

Realistic 2007, 2008, 2010, 2011,

2012, 2017

Rex 2048

Roadstar 2033, 2043

Runco 2019

Saba 2040, 2048

Saisho 2028, 2041

Salora 2030

Samsung 2008, 2043, 2049

Sansui 2006, 2032

Sanyo 2007, 2008, 2030, 2036

Saville 2047

SBR 2034

Schaub Lorenz 2036

Schneider 2033, 2034

Scott 2015

Sears 2007, 2010, 2013, 2021

SEG 2043

SEI 2028, 2034

Sharp 2016, 2017, 2031

Shintom 2004, 2033, 2036

Shorai 2028

Siemens 2034, 2036, 2039

Singer 2010

Sinudyne 2028, 2034

Sonolor 2030, 2031

Sony 2004, 2018, 2024

STS 2010, 2021

Sunkai 2046

Sylvania 2010, 2011, 2012, 2014

Symphonic 2012

Tandy 2007

Tatung 2034

Teac 2012

Technics 2010, 2042

Teknika 2010, 2012

Telefunken 2048

Thomson 2048

Thorn 2035, 2036

Toshiba 2013, 2015, 2022, 2034,

2048

Totevision 2008

Uher 2043

Unitech 2008

Universum 2034, 2039, 2043

Vector Research 2005, 2006

Video Concepts 2005, 2006, 2022

Wards 2008, 2010, 2012, 2013,

2017, 2021, 2027

XR-1000 2010, 2012

Yamaha 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009

Yoko 2043

Zenith 2004, 2019, 2024

Manufacturer Control code

Admiral 1026, 1040, 1062

Akai 1002, 1067

Akura 1045

Alba 1035, 1043

Amplivision 1063

Amstrad 1035, 1067

Amtron 1009

Anam National 1003, 1009

Anitech 1035

AOC 1004, 1005, 1006

Arc en Ciel 1066

Arcam 1063

ASA 1040

Audiovox 1009

Autovox 1040, 1068

Baird 1069

Bang & Olufsen 1040

Baur 1036, 1054, 1055, 1058,

1059, 1068

Beko 1052

Bell & Howell 1010, 1017

Binatone 1063

Blaupunkt 1041, 1042, 1044, 1058,

1059

Boots 1063

Brionvega 1040

Bruns 1040

BSR 1048

Bush 1035, 1043, 1048, 1050,

1053, 1057

Cascade 1035

Celebrity 1002

Century 1040

Cimline 1035, 1043

Citizen 1004, 1006, 1009, 1017,

1022, 1025

Clatronic 1052

Colortyme 1004, 1006

Condor 1052

Contec 1035

Contec/Cony 1007, 1009

Continental Edison 1066

Craig 1009

Crosley 1040

Crown 1009, 1014, 1035, 1052

Curtis Mathes 1001, 1004, 1006, 1010,

1017, 1022, 1025, 1034

Daewoo 1004, 1005, 1006, 1025,

1035, 1053

Daytron 1004, 1006, 1025, 1035

Decca 1067

Dimensia 1001, 1034

Dixi 1035

Dual 1057, 1068

Dumont 1004, 1039, 1040

Electroband 1002

Electrohome 1002, 1003, 1004, 1006,

1008

Elta 1035

Emerson

1004, 1006, 1007, 1009,

1010, 1017, 1025, 1027,

1029, 1033, 1040, 1070

Envision 1004, 1006

Erres 1037

Europhon 1067

Fidelity 1068

Finlux 1039, 1040, 1067

Firstline 1035, 1043, 1048, 1049,

1063

Fisher 1010, 1017, 1052, 1063,

1068

Formenti 1040

Frontech 1045, 1062

Fujitsu 1070

Funai 1009, 1045, 1048, 1070

GE 1001, 1003, 1004, 1006,

1011, 1012, 1019, 1034

GEC 1038, 1063, 1067, 1069

Geloso 1035

Genexxa 1062

GoldStar 1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,

1008, 1025, 1047, 1063

Goodmans 1043, 1053, 1063

Gorenje 1052

Graetz 1062, 1069

Granada 1063, 1067

Grundig 1039, 1041, 1042, 1058,

1059, 1064

Hallmark 1004, 1006

Hanseatic 1060, 1068

Hantarex 1067

HCM 1035

Hinari 1035, 1043

Hitachi

1004, 1006, 1007, 1013,

1027, 1038, 1062, 1063,

1069

Huanyu 1053

ICE 1045, 1063

Imperial 1052

Inﬁnity 1014

Inno Hit 1056, 1067

Interfunk 1055, 1062, 1066, 1069

Intervision 1045, 1063

ITT 1062, 1068, 1069

JBL 1014

JC Penney

1001, 1004, 1005, 1006,

1011, 1012, 1016, 1019,

1022, 1025, 1034

Jensen 1004, 1006

JVC 1007, 1012, 1013, 1015,

1033

Kaisui 1035, 1063

Kapsch 1062, 1069

Kathrein 1060

Kawasho 1002, 1004, 1006

Kendo 1043

Kenwood 1004, 1006, 1008

Kloss Novabeam 1009

Korting 1040

KTV 1009, 1025

LG 1005

Manufacturer Control code

133

Using the Remote Controller

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components

—Continued

Manufacturer Control code

Loewe 1014, 1040, 1055

Luxman 1004, 1006

LXI 1001, 1006, 1010, 1014,

1016, 1017, 1034

M Electronic 1035, 1053, 1062, 1063

Magnadyne 1040, 1067, 1068

Magnafon 1067

Magnavox 1004, 1006, 1008, 1014,

1018, 1020

Marantz 1004, 1006, 1014, 1060

Matsui 1035, 1043, 1048, 1050,

1063, 1064, 1067, 1068

Megatron 1006

Memorex 1005, 1006, 1010, 1017,

1035

Metz 1040, 1051, 1058

MGA 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008

Minerva 1039, 1058, 1059, 1064

Mitsubishi 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008,

1040, 1055, 1058

Mivar 1047, 1056, 1067

Motorola 1003, 1026

MTC 1004, 1005, 1006, 1022,

1055

Multitech 1009, 1035

NAD 1006, 1016

NEC 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006

Neckermann 1040, 1041, 1054, 1059,

1060

Nikkai 1045

Nikko 1006

Oceanic 1062

Onwa 1009

Optonica 1021, 1026

Orion 1029, 1043, 1048, 1049,

1050, 1067, 1068

Osaki 1045, 1063

Otto Versand

1036, 1041, 1043, 1054,

1055, 1058, 1059, 1060,

1063

Palladium 1052

Panasonic

1003, 1012, 1014, 1031,

1044, 1046, 1051, 1061,

1062, 1069

Pathe Marconi 1066

Philco

1003, 1004, 1005, 1006,

1007, 1008, 1014, 1018,

1040

Philips

1003, 1004, 1007, 1008,

1014, 1018, 1019, 1020,

1037, 1038, 1040, 1053,

1059, 1060

Phoenix 1040

Phonola 1037, 1040

Pioneer 1004, 1006, 1027, 1062

Portland 1004, 1005, 1006, 1025

Price Club 1022

Prism 1012

Profex 1035

Proline 1049

Proscan 1001, 1034

Protech 1035, 1045, 1063

Proton 1004, 1006, 1007

Pye 1037

Quasar 1003, 1012, 1031

Quelle 1036, 1039, 1054, 1055,

1058, 1059, 1068

Radio Shack 1010, 1017, 1034

Radio Shack/

Realistic

1001, 1004, 1006, 1007,

1009, 1010, 1017, 1021,

1025

Radiola 1037

Radiomarelli 1040, 1067

RCA 1001, 1003, 1004, 1005,

1006, 1008, 1027, 1034

Realistic 1010, 1017, 1034

Rex 1045, 1062

RFT 1040

Roadstar 1035, 1045

Saba 1040, 1062, 1066, 1069

Saisho 1035, 1043, 1045, 1067,

1068

Salora 1062

Sambers 1056, 1067

Sampo 1004, 1006, 1025

Samsung

1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,

1008, 1022, 1025, 1035,

1045, 1047, 1052, 1056,

1060, 1063, 1065

Sansui 1029

Sanyo 1004, 1010, 1017

SBR 1037, 1038

Schaub Lorenz 1069

Schneider 1068

Scott 1004, 1006, 1007, 1009,

1070

Sears

1001, 1004, 1006, 1008,

1010, 1015, 1016, 1017,

1028, 1034, 1070

SEG 1045, 1063

SEI 1036, 1040, 1048, 1067,

1068

Seleco 1062

Sharp 1004, 1006, 1007, 1021,

1023, 1025, 1026

Shorai 1048

Siarem 1040, 1067

Siemens 1041, 1042, 1058, 1059

Singer 1040

Sinudyne 1036, 1040, 1043, 1067,

1068

Solavox 1062

Sonoko 1035

Sonolor 1062

Sony 1002, 1030, 1032, 1036,

1054

Soundesign 1004, 1006, 1009, 1070

Starlite 1009

Stern 1062

Sunkai 1043, 1048, 1049, 1050

Sylvania 1004, 1006, 1008, 1014,

1018, 1020

Symphonic 1009, 1028

Tandy 1026, 1062, 1063

Tashiko 1038, 1063

Tatung 1003, 1063, 1067

Tec 1063

Technics 1012, 1044, 1061

Manufacturer Control code

Techwood 1004, 1006, 1012

Teknika

1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,

1009, 1022, 1025, 1031,

1070

Teleavia 1066

Telecaption 1024

Telefunken 1066

Teletech 1035

Teleton 1063

Tensai 1048

Thomson 1066

Thorn 1054, 1055, 1058

Toshiba 1010, 1016, 1017, 1022,

1024, 1039

Totevision 1025

Triumph 1067

Universal 1011, 1019

Universum 1045, 1052, 1058

Voxson 1040, 1062

Waltham 1063

Wards

1001, 1004, 1005, 1006,

1008, 1011, 1014, 1018,

1019, 1020, 1021, 1034,

1070

Watt Radio 1068

Wega 1040

Yamaha 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008

Yoko 1045, 1063

Zenith 1004

Manufacturer Control code

134

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components

—Continued

Controlling a Satellite Tuner

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source

and the remote controller mode for your satellite

tuner.

Perform this operation while both the [Mode] and

[Input] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to

operate only the satellite tuner without changing the

input source, press the [Mode] button and roll the

scroll wheel to select “SAT.”

2. Point the remote controller at your satellite

tuner, and use the following buttons (you must

enter appropriate remote control code ﬁrst).

The following buttons control the RDC-7.1.

Controlling a VCR

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source

and the remote controller mode for your VCR.

Perform this operation while both the [Mode] and

[Input] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to

operate only the VCR without changing the input

source, press the [Mode] button and roll the scroll

wheel to select “VCR.”

2. Point the remote controller at your VCR, and use

the following buttons (you must enter appropri-

ate remote control code ﬁrst).

The following buttons control the RDC-7.1.

On, Standby

Set the satellite tuner to On or

Standby

CH/Disc +/–

Select satellite channels

///

Select menu items

Enter

Conﬁrm selection

Number buttons

Enter numbers

VOL

Adjust the RDC-7.1 volume

Muting

Mute the RDC-7.1

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

CH/Disc +/–

Enter

Mode

VOL /

Muting

///

On,

Standby

Number

buttons

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

On, Standby

Set the VCR to On or Standby

CH/Disc +/–

Select TV channels

Play

Stop

Rewind

Fast forward

Pause

Rec

●

Record

VOL

Adjust the RDC-7.1 volume

Muting

Mute the RDC-7.1

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

CH/Disc +/–

Mode

VOL /

Muting

On,

Standby

Rec

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

135

Using the Remote Controller

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components

—Continued

Controlling a TV

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source

and the remote controller mode for your TV.

Perform this operation while both the [Mode] and

[Input] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to

operate only the TV without changing the input

source, press the [Mode] button and roll the scroll

wheel to select “TV.”

2. Point the remote controller at your TV, and use

the following buttons (you must enter appropri-

ate remote control code first).

* Buttons marked with an asterisk can always be used to control a

TV regardless of the currently selected remote controller mode.

These buttons do not work with the additional TV modes.

The following buttons control the RDC-7.1.

Controlling a Cable Receiver

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source

and the remote controller mode for your cable

receiver.

Perform this operation while both the [Mode] and

[Input] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to

operate only the cable receiver without changing the

input source, press the [Mode] button and roll the

scroll wheel to select “CBL.”

2. Point the remote controller at your cable

receiver, and use the following buttons (you must

enter appropriate remote control code first).

The following buttons control the RDC-7.1.

On, Standby

Set the TV to On or Standby

TV on/off

TV CH +/–

Select TV channels

Number buttons

Enter numbers

CH/Disc +/–

Select cable channels

TV Input

Select TV or VCR input

TV VOL

Adjust the TV volume

VOL

Adjust the RDC-7.1 volume

Muting

Mute the RDC-7.1

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

CH/Disc +/–

Mode

VOL /

Muting

///

On,

Standby

TV Input

TV VOL */

TV CH +/–*

Number

buttons

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

On, Standby

Set the cable receiver to On or

Standby

CH/Disc +/–

Select cable channels

Number buttons

Enter numbers

VOL

Adjust the RDC-7.1 volume

Muting

Mute the RDC-7.1

CH/Disc +/–

Mode

VOL /

Muting

On,

Standby

ABC DEF

PQRS TUV WXYZ

GHI JKL MNO

Caps Delete

Language Loca

ion

Album Ar

tist GenrePlaylist

Repeat Video Music Photo

@.-'/

---

Direct Tuning

Custom

Display

Dimmer

Input

Sleep

Random

Main A Main B

Muting

AngleSubtitleAudio

MemorySearchA-BRepeat

On Standby

V CH

V VOL

Rec

Last Memory

Enter

Test

Tone

CH SEL

Pure A

Surround

Direct

Stereo

Re-EQ

THX

Level

L Night

Audio

SEL

DSP DSP

10 0

Clear

123

456

789

Input

VOL

Disc

Zone

InputMode

Macro

Number

buttons

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

RC-555M

136

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components

—Continued

You can teach the RDC-7.1’s remote controller new

commands simply by transmitting commands from

another remote controller one at a time. For example, by

transmitting the Play and Stop commands from your

CD player’s remote controller, the RDC-7.1’s remote

controller can be taught to transmit those commands

when its Play [ ] and Stop [ ] buttons are pressed in

CD mode.

This is convenient when you want to add commands to

buttons after entering a remote control code (See page

129).

Notes:

•The following buttons cannot be taught new com-

mands: [LIGHT], [Custom], [Macro], [Mode],

[Input], [Zone 2], [Zone 3], and the scroll wheel but-

ton.

•The RDC-7.1’s remote controller can learn a total of

150 commands. However, the commands of some

remote controllers may use a lot of memory, in which

case, this total will be reduced.

•If the message “FULL” appears, the remote control-

ler cannot learn any more commands because its

memory is full.

•By default, the RDC-7.1’s remote controller knows

the commands for controlling an IntegraRESEARCH/

Onkyo CD player, cassette deck, DVD player, and

MD recorder (e.g., Play, Stop, Pause, etc., buttons).

You can teach these buttons new commands, although

the defaults will be restored if the remote controller is

reset.

•To teach a new command to a button that has already

been taught a command, simply repeat this proce-

dure.

•Like most remote controllers, the RDC-7.1’s remote

controller uses infrared. Commands from remote

controllers that don’t use infrared cannot be learned.

•When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all

learned commands will be lost and will have to be

learned all over again, so don’t discard your other

remote controllers.

Learning Commands from Another

Remote Controller

Press and hold the [Custom] but-

ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom

mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“LEARN,” and then press the

scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the

the remote controller mode you

want to teach a new command,

and then press the scroll wheel.

On the RDC-7.1’s remote control-

ler, press the button you want to

teach the new command.

If you press a button that cannot be

taught a new command, the message

“RETRY” appears and you should press

another button.

Custom

Point the remote controllers at

each other, about 2 to 6 inches (5–

15 cm) apart, and then, on the

other remote controller, press the

button whose command you want

to learn.

When the command has been learned

successfully, “OK” appears on the dis-

play. You may need to press the button

several times.

If the command is not learned success-

fully, after the message “FAIL” has been

displayed, the mode select display reap-

pears (step 3), and you should try again.

To teach the RDC-7.1’s remote

controller more new commands,

repeat steps 3 through 5.

Press the [Custom] button when you’ve

ﬁnished.

137

Using the Remote Controller

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components

—Continued

With the Macro function you can program the remote

controller to perform a sequence of actions with one

press of a button. For example, normally you need to

perform the following actions to use a CD player that’s

connected to the RDC-7.1:

1. Press the scroll wheel, (to select AMP mode).

2. Press the [On] button (to turn on the RDC-7.1).

3. Roll the scroll wheel to select CD (to select the

CD remote controller mode and the CD input

source).

4. Press the Play [ ] button (to start the CD

player).

With the Macro function you can program the remote

controller to do all of this with one press of a button.

Making Macros

You can make up to eight macros, and each macro can

perform up to eight actions.

Using Macros

Press and hold the [Custom] but-

ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom

mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“MACRO,” and then press the

scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“EDIT,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select a

macro, and then press the scroll

wheel.

Macros are numbered from 1 to 8.

Custom

Macro #1 selected

Action #1

On the remote controller, press the

buttons whose actions you want to

program into the macro in the

order you want them performed.

To program the CD example in the left

column into a macro: press the scroll

wheel, press the [On] button, roll the

scroll wheel to select CD, press the

scroll wheel, and then press the Play

[ ] button.

Actions are numbered from 1 to 8.

After each button is pressed, “SET” fol-

lowed by “KEY” is displayed.

To add an action that selects an input

source for the main room, Zone, 2 or

Zone 3,

press the [Input], [Zone 2], or

[Zone 3] button, respectively, roll the

scroll wheel to select the input source,

and then press the scroll wheel.

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the

Macro button.

After the following appears on the dis-

play, the display returns to normal.

Macro #1 selected

8 actions learned

Macro

138

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components

—Continued

Running Macros

Programmed macros can be run as follows.

Naming Macros

You can name your macros as follows. Names may con-

tain of up to five characters.

Press the [Macro] button.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the

macro’s number, and then press

the scroll wheel.

The actions in the macro are per-

formed in the order in which they were

programmed.

Press and hold the [Custom] but-

ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom

mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“MACRO,” and then press the

scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“NAME,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the

number of the macro that you want

to name, and then press the scroll

wheel.

Custom

Macro #1 selected

1st character

Roll the scroll wheel to select a

character, and then press the

scroll wheel to set it.

The following characters are available.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K

L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z + – = < >

_ ¯¯ / \ * space

Repeat step 5 until you’ve entered

all 5 characters.

The previous menu reappears.

If the name you are entering consists of

less than ﬁve characters, enter spaces at

the end to ﬁll all ﬁve places.

Macro #1 selected

1st character set

139

Using the Remote Controller

Other Settings for the Remote Controller

Adding New Remote Controller Modes

You can add additional modes (DVD, TV, VCR, CBL,

SAT) to the remote controller. This is useful if, for

example, you have several DVD players or TVs.

Reordering the Remote Controller Modes

You can change the order in which the remote controller

modes appear when you roll the scroll wheel. The posi-

tion of the AMP mode cannot be changed.

Editing Remote Controller Modes

Press and hold the [Custom] but-

ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom

mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“MODE,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“ADD,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the

type of mode you want to add, and

then press the scroll wheel.

You can add up to 8 additional modes:

for example, 4 DVD, 2 TV, 1 VCR, and

1 CBL.

Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] but-

ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom

mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“MODE,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“SORT,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the

mode you want to move, and then

press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the

mode before which you want to

insert the speciﬁed mode, and

then press the scroll wheel.

Here the speciﬁed mode will be inserted

before the “VCR” mode.

If the move is successful, after “OK” has

been displayed, the SORT display (step

3) reappears.

Custom

140

Other Settings for the Remote Controller

—Continued

Deleting Remote Controller Modes

You can delete remote controller modes that you don’t

need, such as modes for components that you don’t

have.

The AMP mode cannot be deleted.

Assigning Remote Controller Modes

You can change the combination in selecting the input

source and remote controller mode simultaneously

using the scroll wheel. For example, when the input

source (top) is “TAPE1” and the remote controller

mode (bottom) is “AMP,” you can change only “AMP”

(the remote controller mode) to “CDR.”

Press and hold the [Custom] but-

ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom

mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“MODE,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“DEL,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the

mode you want to delete, and then

press the scroll wheel.

If the mode is deleted successfully, after

“OK” has been displayed, the DEL dis-

play (step 3) reappears.

Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] but-

ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom

mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“MODE,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“ASSGN,” and then press the

scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select an

input source, and then press the

scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the

mode you want to assign to the

speciﬁed input source, and then

press the scroll wheel.

If the assignment is successful, after

“OK” has been displayed, the ASSGN

display (step 3) reappears.

Custom

141

Using the Remote Controller

Other Settings for the Remote Controller

—Continued

You can reset the remote controller to its default set-

tings.

You can set the remote controller’s transmission signal

format to either infrared (IR) or radio frequency (RF).

The default setting is IR.

This is useful when, for example, the RDC-7.1 is

installed in a rack or is not in line of sight of the remote

controller as it allows you to use a commercially avail-

able RF receiver to pick up commands from the remote

controller, which are then fed to the RDC-7.1 via its IR

IN socket. For this to work, you must assign the same

ID and channel to the remote controller and RF receiver.

Resetting the Remote Controller

Press and hold the [Custom] but-

ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom

mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“SETUP,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“RESET,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“YES,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

The remote controller is reset to its

default settings.

Using the Remote Controller with

Radio Frequency (RC-555M only)

Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] but-

ton for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom

mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select

“SETUP,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “IR/

RF,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “IR”

or “RF,” and then press the scroll

wheel.

When you select “IR.”

If you select “RF,” roll the scroll

wheel to select the same ID as the

RF receiver, and then press the

scroll wheel.

IDs 0 to 9 and A to F can be selected.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the

same channel as the RF receiver,

and then press the scroll wheel.

Channels 0 to 3 can be selected.

If the ID and channel have been set suc-

cessfully, “OK” appears on the display.

Custom

142

Other Settings for the Remote Controller

—Continued

This section explains how to change the remote control-

ler’s ID. You may need to change this if the RDC-7.1’s

remote controller interferes with other IntegraRESEARCH/

Onkyo components located in the same room.

Note:

If you change the remote controller’s ID, be sure to select

the same ID on the RDC-7.1. For details on setting up the

RDC-7.1’s remote control ID, refer to the “Remote Con-

trol Setup Sub-menu” section on page 91. The default ID

for both the RDC-

7.1 and remote controller is 1.

Changing the Remote Controller’s

Control ID

Hold down the remote controller’s [Cus-

tom] button for more than three seconds.

The remote controller enters Custom mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “SETUP”

menu, and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select ID menu,

and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select an

ID—1 (default), 2, or 3—and then

press the scroll wheel.

Select the same ID as that set on the

RDC-7.1.

143

Miscellaneous

Relationship Between Input Source and Listening

Mode

Note:

Available listening modes may differ depending on your region and the option board installed.

Button

Input Signal Format PCM

Dolby Digital Dolby Digital/AAC AAC Analog Multichannel

Multichannel

(*/2)

Multichannel

(Other than

*/2)

2ch 1/0 1+1 5.1ch 7.1ch

Type of source

Listening mode

CD, TV, LD,

VHS, MD,

Vinyl, Radio,

Cassette, Cable,

Satellite, etc.

DVD, Digital cable/satellite, etc. DVD-Audio, Super

Audio CD

Direct Direct

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Pure A Pure Audio

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Stereo Stereo

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Multiplex

Surround

Dolby Pro

Logic II

• PLII Movie

✔ ✔

• PLII Music

✔✔

• PLII Game

✔✔

Dolby Pro

Logic IIx

• PLIIx Movie

✔✔ ✔ ✔

• PLIIx Music

✔✔ ✔ ✔

• PLIIx Game

✔✔

Dolby Digital/AAC

✔✔

Dolby VS

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔✔

DTS

DTS 96/24

DTS-ES Discrete

DTS-ES Matrix

DTS NEO:6 (NEO:6 Matrix)

✔✔

• NEO:6 Cinema

✔✔

• NEO:6 Music

✔✔

Multichannel

✔✔

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-

Audio

i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD

THX

THX • THX Cinema

✔ ✔✔✔ ✔✔

• THX Ultra2 Cinema

✔✔

• THX Music Mode

✔✔

• THX Games Mode

✔ ✔✔✔ ✔✔

• THX SurroundEX

✔✔

DSP, DSP

Mono

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

All Ch Stereo

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Full Mono

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Mono Movie

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Enhance

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Orchestra

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Unplugged

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Studio-Mix

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

TV Logic

✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

144

Relationship Between Input Source and Listening Mode

—Continued

*2 NEO:6-96k

Button

Input Signal Format

DTS DTS96/24

Discrete/

Matrix

Multichanne

(*/2)

Multichannel

(Other than

*/2)

2/0 1/0

Multichannel

(*/2)

Multichannel

(Other than

*/2)

Matrix 2ch 1/0

Type of source

Listening mode DVD, LD, CD, etc.

Direct Direct

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Pure A Pure Audio

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Stereo Stereo

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Multiplex

Surround

Dolby Pro

Logic II

• PLII Movie

✔✔

• PLII Music

✔✔

• PLII Game

✔✔

Dolby Pro

Logic IIx

• PLIIx Movie

✔✔✔ ✔

• PLIIx Music

✔✔✔ ✔

• PLIIx Game

✔✔

Dolby Digital/AAC

Dolby VS

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔ ✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔✔

DTS

✔✔ ✔

DTS 96/24

✔✔✔

DTS-ES Discrete

✔

DTS-ES Matrix

✔

DTS NEO:6 (NEO:6 Matrix)

✔✔

• NEO:6 Cinema

✔✔

• NEO:6 Music

✔✔

Multichannel

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-

Audio

i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD

THX

THX • THX Cinema

✔✔✔ ✔✔✔✔ ✔

• THX Ultra2 Cinema

✔✔✔✔

• THX Music Mode

✔✔✔✔

• THX Games Mode

✔✔✔ ✔✔✔✔ ✔

• THX SurroundEX

✔✔

DSP, DSP

Mono

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

All Ch Stereo

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Full Mono

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Mono Movie

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Enhance

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Orchestra

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Unplugged

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Studio-Mix

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

TV Logic

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

145

Miscellaneous

Relationship Between Input Source and Listening Mode

—Continued

Button

Input Signal Format

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio i.LINK(IEEE1394):

SACD

Multichannel

(*/2)

Multichannel

(Other than

*/2)

2/0 1/0 1+1 176.4/192

kHz

Multichannel

(3/2)

2/0

Type of source

Listening mode DVD-Audio Super Audio CD

Direct Direct

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Pure A Pure Audio

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Stereo Stereo

✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

Multiplex

✔

Surround

Dolby Pro

Logic II

• PLII Movie

✔✔

• PLII Music

✔✔

• PLII Game

✔✔

Dolby Pro

Logic IIx

• PLIIx Movie

✔✔ ✔✔

• PLIIx Music

✔✔ ✔✔

• PLIIx Game

✔✔

Dolby Digital/AAC

Dolby VS

✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔✔

DTS

DTS 96/24

DTS-ES Discrete

DTS-ES Matrix

DTS NEO:6 (NEO:6 Matrix)

✔✔

• NEO:6 Cinema

✔✔

• NEO:6 Music

✔✔

Multichannel

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-

Audio

✔✔

i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD

✔

THX

THX • THX Cinema

✔✔✔ ✔✔

• THX Ultra2 Cinema

✔✔

• THX Music Mode

✔✔

• THX Games Mode

✔✔✔ ✔✔

• THX SurroundEX

✔✔

DSP, DSP

Mono

✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

All Ch Stereo

✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

Full Mono

✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

Mono Movie

✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

Enhance

✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

Orchestra

✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

Unplugged

✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

Studio-Mix

✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

TV Logic

✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

146

Using the RDC-7.1 with Option Boards

– USA, Canada, and Australian models only –

The following option boards are available for the RDC-7.1 as of November 2004.

Types of the RDC-7.1 Option Boards

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R FRONT R CENTER FRONT L

SURR BACK L

SURR L

SUBWOOFER

PRE

OUT A

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

C-NET-A C-MULTI C-VIDEO C-CPNT-BNC

C-AES C-CPNT-RCA

C-AMFM C-HDMI

(

Net-Tune

)

C D

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL COAXIAL

OUT

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

MULTI

-CH

SBR SBL

SR SL

SUB C

FR FL

MULTI

-CH

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

DIGITAL IN

(BALANCED)

AES/ EBU

AUDIO IN

LRRL

OUT

GND

OUT

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

IN IN IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEOS VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

OUT OUT

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

OUT

(

HD/ BNC

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

CENTER

SURRFRONT

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

OUT

INLET

MODEL NO.

RDC-

7.1

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

A B

UDD

232

V DC PWR SUPPLY

MAIN

GND

ZONE

GND

TRIGGER

OUT

100mA MAX.

TOTAL

100mA MAX.

200mA MAX.

20mA MAX.

12 V

TRIGGER

OUT

147

Miscellaneous

Using the RDC-7.1 with Option Boards – USA, Canada, and Australian

models only –

—Continued

Distribution regions (as of November 2004)

(the United States and Canada)

(Australia)

Product number: C-NET-A

Provides one Ethernet port for the Net Audio connection. Connecting the network server to the port allows you to enjoy

music stored on your PC or delivered from an Internet radio broadcast.

This option board will be inserted into slot B on the RDC-7.1.

Product number: C-MULTI

Provides two analog multichannel input terminal sets.

This option board will be inserted into slot E on the RDC-7.1.

Product number: C-AES

Provides one analog multichannel input terminal set and one AES/EBU digital audio input jack.

This option board will be inserted into slot E on the RDC-7.1.

Product number: C-VIDEO

Provides the following video connection terminals.

Composite video: Input

6, Output

S Video: Input

6, Output

Component video (RCA): Input

3, Output

This option board will be inserted over slots H and I on the RDC-7.1.

Product number: C-CPNT-BNC

Provides BNC-type component video terminals. One input terminal set and one output terminal set are available.

This option board will be inserted into slot J on the RDC-7.1.

Product number: C-CPNT-RCA

Provides RCA-type component video terminals. One input terminal set and one output terminal set are available.

This option board will be inserted into slot J on the RDC-7.1.

Product number: C-FMAM

Provides terminals for FM and AM tuners.

This option board will be inserted into slot K on the RDC-7.1.

Product number: C-HDMI

Provides HDMI terminals. Two input terminals and one output terminal are available.

This option board will be inserted into slot L on the RDC-7.1.

148

Using the RDC-7.1 with Option Boards – USA, Canada, and Australian

models only –

—Continued

The option boards should be installed in their individual

designated slots. Installing the option board on a

different slot may cause failure.

Installing the Option Boards (USA

and Australian Models Only)

Turn off the power and unplug the power

cord both from the RDC-7.1 and electrical

outlet.

Be sure to turn off the power of the RDC-7.1.

Inserting or removing an option board with the

RDC-7.1 turned on may cause failure.

Take the option board out from the pack-

age carefully.

The option board incorporates many components,

terminals and connectors along with solderings

on its surface. Touching the board with your ﬁn-

gers may cause failure or damage from static elec-

tricity, incorrect contact and so on. When

handling the board, be sure to hold the outer part

or panel section of the board without touching the

board surface.

Check the alphabet letter on the option

board.

The alphabet letter is printed at the top left corner

of the panel section.

Remove the sub-panel with the same

alphabet letter as your option board from

the back of the RDC-7.1.

Use the supplied Allen wrench to loosen the

screw gradually, while holding the sub-panel so

that the panel will not drop down.

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

Board

surface

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

The sub-panels are ﬁxed to the RDC-7.1 with two

screws at the top and bottom, while the panel that

covers slots [H] and [I] is ﬁxed with four screws

at the top and bottom. Keep the removed screws

for ﬁxing the option board.

Insert the option board along the rail

softly. When the board comes to the posi-

tion where it stops but does not cover the

slot completely, push the board forward a

little bit more strongly.

Fix the option board ﬁrmly to the RDC-7.1

using the removed screws.

Be sure to tighten the screws ﬁrmly to the RDC-7.1.

If the screws are loose, contact failures for ground

or signal wires may occur at the section between the

RDC-7.1’ s slot terminal and the option board,

which may cause the RDC-7.1 or board to fail.

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

AUDIO

The

i.LINK

logo

trademarks

Sony

Corporation, registered

the

U.S.

and

other

countries.

S400

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICALCOAXIAL

OUT

PRE

OUT A

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

AUDIO

The

i.LINK

logo

trademarks

Sony

Corporation, registered

the

U.S.

and

other

countries.

S400

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICALCOAXIAL

OUT

PRE

OUT A

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

FRONT

CENTER

SURR

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R

SUBWOOFER

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

SINGLE

)

(

ASSIGNABLE

)

“Net-Tune”

trademark

Onkyo

Corporation.

ETHERNET

(

Net-Tune

)

AUDIO

The

i.LINK

logo

trademarks

Sony

Corporation, registered

the

U.S.

and

other

countries.

S400

DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN

OPTICALCOAXIAL

OUT

PRE

OUT A

149

Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting

If you have any trouble using your RDC-7.1, look for a solu-

tion in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, con-

tact the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.

Can’t turn on the RDC-7.1?

•Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the

wall outlet. And also, make sure that the other end of the

power cord is properly connected to the RDC-7.1’s AC

INLET.

•Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait ﬁve sec-

onds or more, then plug the cord in again.

The RDC-7.1 turns off as soon as it’s turned on?

•The amp protection circuit has been activated.

Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immediately

and contact the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.

The [Standby] indicator on the RDC-7.1 remains lit?

•It is supposed that the RDC-7.1 is using a source in Zone 2

or 3. When not using, set both Zone 2 and 3 to “Off” (page

71).

There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet?

•Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed in all

the way.

•Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components are

connected properly (pages 25-44).

•Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct

and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of

each speaker terminal on the power ampliﬁer.

•Make sure that the input source is properly selected (pages

52, 53).

•Check the volume. It can be set from –81.5 to +18 (pages

52, 53).

The RDC-7.1 is designed for home theater enjoyment. It

has a wide volume range, allowing for precise adjustment.

•If the MUTING indicator is shown on the display, press the

remote controller’s [Muting] button to unmute the RDC-7.1

(page 54).

•While a pair of headphones is connected to the Phones

jack, no sound is output by the speakers (page 54).

•Check the digital audio output setting on the connected

device. On some games consoles, such as those that support

DVD, the default setting is off.

•With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio

output format from a menu.

•Make sure that the correct input signal audio format is

selected with the [Audio SEL] button (page 57).

•To use a turntable with an MC-type cartridge requires a

commercially available MC phono preamp (page 38).

•Make sure that none of the connecting cables is bent,

twisted, or damaged.

•Not all listening modes use all of the speakers.

•Specify the Speaker/Output Setup and Input Setup (pages

92-102).

Only the front speakers produce sound?

•When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the front

speakers and subwoofer produce sound.

•When the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected,

only the front speakers produce sound.

•Make sure the speakers are conﬁgured correctly (page 92).

Only the center speaker produces sound?

•If you use the Pro Logic II/IIx Movie or Pro Logic II/IIx

Music listening mode with a mono source, such as an AM

radio station or mono TV program, the sound is concen-

trated in the center speaker.

•Make sure the speakers are conﬁgured correctly (page 92).

The surround speakers produce no sound?

•When the Stereo, Direct, or Pure Audio listening mode is

selected, the surround speakers produce no sound (page

58).

•Depending on the source and current listening mode, not

much sound may be produced by the surround speakers.

Try selecting another listening mode.

•Make sure the speakers are conﬁgured correctly (page 92).

The center speaker produces no sound?

•When the Stereo, Direct, or Pure Audio listening mode is

selected, the center speaker produces no sound (page 58).

•When the listening mode is set to “Mono,” no sound can be

present in the center speaker.

•Make sure the speakers are conﬁgured correctly (page 92).

The surround back speakers produce no sound?

•The surround back speakers are not used with all listening

modes. Select another listening mode (pages 58-60).

•Not much sound may be produced by the surround back

speakers with some sources.

•If the “SB Mode (5ch)” is available in any sub-menu of the

“Listening Mode Setup” menu, make sure that it is not set

to “Off” (pages 106-112).

•Make sure the speakers are conﬁgured correctly (page 92).

The subwoofer produces no sound?

•When you play source material that contains no informa-

tion in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.

•Make sure the speakers are conﬁgured correctly (pages 92,

93).

There’s no sound with a certain signal format?

•Check the input signal format setting. Depending on the

playback source, you can select Auto, Multich, Analog, or

i.LINK (page 57).

•Check the digital audio output setting on the connected

device. On some games consoles, such as those that support

DVD, the default setting is off.

•With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio

output format from a menu.

•Depending on the input signal, some listening modes can-

not be selected (pages 143-145).

Can’t select the DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix or THX Sur-

round EX listening modes?

•These modes cannot be selected when no surround back

speakers are connected, or Zone 2/3 is being used.

•If the “SB Mode (5ch)” is available in any sub-menu of the

“Listening Mode Setup” menu, make sure that it is not set

to “Off” (pages 106-112).

Power

Audio

150

Troubleshooting

—Continued

Can’t get 6.1 or 7.1 playback?

•If no surround back speakers are connected, or Zone 2/3 is

being used, 6.1 and 7.1 playback is not possible.

•If the “SB Mode (5ch)” is available in any sub-menu of the

“Listening Mode Setup” menu, make sure that it is not set

to “Off” (pages 106-112).

The volume cannot be set above 99?

•When the levels of all speakers have been calibrated (page

94), the maximum volume setting may change.

Noise can be heard?

•Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power cords,

speaker cables, and so on may degrade the audio perfor-

mance, so don’t do it.

•An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try reposi-

tioning your cables.

The Late Night function doesn’t work?

•Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital (page 56).

The multichannel input doesn’t work?

•Check the MULTI-CH IN connections (page 66).

•Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to the

correct input source (page 66).

•Set the audio input signal format to Multich (page 67).

About DTS signals

•When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream

stops, the RDC-7.1 remains in DTS listening mode and the

DTS indicator remains on. This is to prevent noise when

you use the pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on

your player. If you switch your player from DTS to PCM,

because the RDC-7.1 does not switch formats immediately,

you may not hear any sound, in which case you should stop

your player for about three seconds, and then resume play-

back.

•With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to play-

back DTS material properly even though your player is

connected to a digital input on the RDC-7.1. This is usually

because the DTS bitstream has been processed (e.g., output

level, sampling rate, or frequency response changed) and

the RDC-7.1 doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal.

In such cases, you may hear noise.

•When playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast

forward, or fast reverse function on your player may pro-

duce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.

There’s no picture?

•Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed in all

the way.

•Make sure that each video component is properly con-

nected.

•Make sure that the proper setting is made for the “Video

Assign” sub-menu under the “Input Setup” menu (page

99).

•On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the

RDC-7.1 is connected is selected.

•While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the video

circuits are turned off and the RDC-7.1 outputs no video

signals.

The onscreen menus (OSD) don’t appear, or they

appear in an odd position?

•Make sure that the proper setting is made for the “Video

Output Assign” sub-menu under the “Speaker/Output

Setup” menu (page 92).

•Make sure that the proper setting is made for the “OSD

Setup” sub-menu under the “Preference” menu (page 120).

•On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the

RDC-7.1 is connected is selected.

Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy, or

the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t appear?

•Relocate your antenna.

•Move the RDC-7.1 away from your TV or computer.

•Press the [Tuning Mode] button to turn off the “AUTO”

indicator, bringing the FM mode to monaural (page 62).

•When listening to an AM station, operating the remote con-

troller may cause noise.

•Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.

•Concrete walls weaken radio signals.

•If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor

antenna.

When the RDC-7.1 is unplugged or a power failure

occurred:

•Normally, the built-in memory retains its contents for 2

weeks. If it loses radio presets, make the presets again.

The remote controller doesn’t work?

•Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct

polarity (page 9).

•Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of batteries

or old and new batteries (page 9).

•Make sure that the remote controller is not too far away

from the RDC-7.1, and that there’s no obstruction between

the remote controller and the RDC-7.1’s remote control

sensor (page 9).

•Make sure that the RDC-7.1 is not subjected to direct sun-

shine or inverter type ﬂuorescent lights. Relocate if neces-

sary.

•If the RDC-7.1 is installed in a rack or cabinet with colored

glass doors, the remote controller may not work reliably

when the doors are closed.

•Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller

mode (page 51).

•When using the remote controller to control other manufac-

turers’ AV components, some buttons may not work as

expected.

•Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control ID.

•If you change the remote controller’s transmission signal

format to RF, be sure to select the same ID as the RF

receiver.

Can’t control other components?

•If it’s an IntegraRESEARCH component, make sure that

the cable and analog audio cable (RCA/phono) are

connected properly. Connecting only an cable won’t

work (page 45).

•Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller

mode (page 51).

Video

Tuner

Remote Controller

151

Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting

—Continued

Can’t learn commands from other remote control-

lers?

•Make sure that the transmitting ends of both remote con-

trollers are pointing at each other.

•Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that cannot

be used for learning? Some commands cannot be learned,

especially those that transmit several instructions with a

single button press.

Can’t record?

•On your recorder, make sure the correct input is selected

(e.g., digital or analog).

•Make sure that proper output settings are made for the con-

nected devices. Settings are available in the “Rec Out” of

the “Audio Output Assign” and “Video Output Assign”

sub-menus under the “Speaker/Output Setup” menu (pages

95, 96).

Zone 2/3 has turned off?

•Was the Sleep function set? The Sleep function turns off

Zone 2/3 as well as the RDC-7.1. To set the Sleep function

for Zone 2/3 only, see page 69.

There’s no sound?

•Recording and Zone 3 operations use the same circuit and

therefore cannot be used at the same time. Make sure that

proper settings are made for outputs. Settings are available

in “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” of the “Audio Output

Assign” and “Video Output Assign” sub-menus under the

“Speaker/Output Setup” menu (pages 95, 96).

The Surr Back speaker setting doesn’t appear?

•If no surround back speakers are connected, or the surround

back outputs are being used with Zone 2/3, this setting is

unavailable.

Can’t access Internet radio or the Net-Tune server?

•Check the connection between the RDC-7.1 and the LAN

port on your router or switch.

•Make sure that your modem and router are properly con-

nected, and make sure they are both turned on.

•Make sure that the Network Setup settings are correct (page

122).

Playback stops while listening to Net-Tune tracks?

•Make sure that your Net-Tune server meets the system

requirements listed on pages 74, 76.

•If the Net-Tune server is serving WAV ﬁles to several cli-

ents at the same time, the network may become overloaded

and playback may be interrupted. This can be resolved by

preparing an Ethernet network exclusively for use with

Net-Tune, separating it from general network trafﬁc, and by

using switches to improve network performance.

Can’t get a list of Internet radio stations from the Xiva-

Net online database?

•Try again later.

Can’t access music on the selected server, or can’t

connect to the server?

•Make sure that your Net-Tune server is turned on.

•Add the MP3, WMA, and WAV ﬁles on your Net-Tune

server.

•Set the RDC-7.1’s [Power] switch to Off, wait ﬁve seconds,

and then set it to On again. If that doesn’t help, restart your

Net-Tune server.

•On the Client Sub-menu, make sure that the NTSP Port set-

ting is set to the same port number as Net-Tune Central.

Correct as necessary (page 123).

Can’t select albums?

•Use the Net-Tune server to add album names to your music

ﬁles.

Can’t select artists?

•Use the Net-Tune server to add artist names to your music

ﬁles.

Can’t select by genre?

•Use the Net-Tune server to add genre names to your music

ﬁles.

No playlists are available?

•Use the Net-Tune server to create some playlists.

The sound changes when I connect my headphones?

•When a pair of headphones is connected, its listening mode

changes depending on the mode that was set before it was

connected.

Can’t change a setting?

•Some settings are not available while using Net-Tune.

Can’t use an audio adjust function?

•Some audio adjust functions can’t be used with certain lis-

tening modes.

The display doesn’t work?

•The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listening

mode is selected.

Recording

Zone 2/Zone 3

Net-Tune

Others

152

Troubleshooting

—Continued

“Not available with Headphones use”

•Operation not allowed while a pair of headphones is con-

nected.

“Not available in this Sp Conﬁg”

•Doesn’t work with the current speaker conﬁguration.

“Only available with Dolby D”

•Can be used with only Dolby Digital.

“Not available with this signal”

•Doesn’t work with the current listening mode.

“Not available with Muting”

•Operation not allowed because the RDC-7.1 is currently

muted.

“Not available in this Listening Mode”

•Doesn’t work with the current listening mode.

“Not available with NET AUDIO use”

•Operation not possible with Net Audio selected for the

input source.

“Not available with Dolby Headphone Off”

•Doesn’t work with the Dolby Headphone function off.

“Not available with Dolby Headphone On”

•Doesn’t work with the Dolby Headphone function on.

“Not available with zone2 out in Line out”

•Operation not possible with “1-8. f. Zone 2 Out” set to

“Line Out.”

“Not available with zone3 out in Line out”

•Operation not possible with “1-8. g. Zone 3 Out” set to

“Line Out.”

Speciﬁcations

– USA and Canadian models –

General

Error Messages

Memory backup

The RDC-7.1 uses a battery-less memory backup sys-

tem in order to retain radio presets and other settings

when it is unplugged or in the case of a power failure.

Although no batteries are required, the RDC-7.1 must

be plugged into an AC outlet in order to charge the

backup system.

(On other than USA, Canadian, and Australian models,

the RDC-7.1’s Power switch must be set to On in order

to charge the backup system). Once it has been

charged, the RDC-7.1 will retain the settings for several

weeks, although this depends on the environment and

time will be shorter in humid climates.

The RDC-7.1 contains a microcomputer for signal pro-

cessing and control functions. In very rare situations,

severe interference, noise from an external source, or

static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely

event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the

wall outlet, wait at least ﬁve seconds, and then plug it

back in again.

To reset the RDC-7.1 to its factory defaults, turn it on

and, while holding down the [Video 1] button, press the

[Standby/On] button. When the reset is complete,

“CLEAR” appears on the display and the RDC-7.1

enters Standby mode.

Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD rental

fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by the

unit’s malfunction. Before you record important data,

make sure that the material will be recorded correctly.

Power Supply Rating: AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Consumption Power: 1.0 A

Standby Power Consumption: 3.9 W

Dimensions (W

D): 17 11/16"

7 3/4"

18 13/16"

(450

197.3

477.1 mm)

Weight: 45.6 lbs (20.7 kg)

Inputs:

Audio

Multichannel (7.1ch) Inputs: 1 or 2 (option)

Phono (MM): 1

Line inputs: 9 (assignable)

Digital inputs Coaxial: 6

Digital inputs Optical: 6 (assignable)

Digital inputs AES/EBU 1 (option)

Video (Option)

Composite Video inputs: 6 (assignable)

S Video inputs: 6 (assignable)

Component Video RCA

inputs: 3 or 4

Component Video BNC

input: 1

Audio and Video

HDMI inputs (19-pin): 2 (option)

Miscellaneous

IR in (phoenix connector): 3 (for Main, Zone 2 and Zone 3)

Outputs:

Audio

Balanced Pre out A: Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,

Surround Back L/R, Subwoofer

Unbalanced Pre out A: Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,

Surround Back L/R, Subwoofer

Unbalanced Pre out B: Subwoofer

Headphones: 1

Line outputs: 5 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out

and Zone 3 out)

Digital outputs Coaxial: 2 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out

and Zone 3 out)

Digital outputs Optical: 2 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out

and Zone 3 out)

Video (Option)

Composite Video outputs: 3 (assignable to Monitor out A/B,

Recout, Zone 2 out and Zone 3 out)

1 (ﬁxed, Monitor out A)

S Video outputs: 3 (assignable to Monitor out A/B

and Recout)

1 (ﬁxed, Monitor out A)

Component Video RCA

outputs: 1 or 2

Component Video BNC

output: 1

Audio and Video

HDMI output (19-pin): 1

Miscellaneous

12V Trigger out (phoenix

connector): 5 (for A, B, C, D, E)

Inputs/Outputs:

Miscellaneous

i. LINK(AUDIO) (4 pin): 2

Ethernet (Net-Tune): 1 (option)

(1/8-inch mini-jack): 1

RS232 (9 pin D-SUB

Female connector): 1

Antennas:

FM: 75 ohms unbalanced

AM: Included loop antenna and external

terminal

AC Inlet: 1 (IEC type)

153

Miscellaneous

Speciﬁcations – USA and Canadian models –

—Continued

Ampliﬁer Section

Tuner Section

Speciﬁcations and features are subject to change without

notice.

Maximum Output Level: 8.5 Vrms

THD (Total Harmonic Distor-

tion): 0.05% (1 Vrms output)

Input Sensitivity and Impedance:

Audio 200 mV, 50 k

Ω

(AUDIO IN 1-9)

2.5 mV, 50 k

Ω

(PHONO MM)

200 mV, 50 k

Ω

(MULTI IN FR/FL/

C/SR/SL/SBR/SBL) (Option)

36 mV, 50 k

Ω

(MULTI IN SUB)

(Option)

0.5 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(DIGITAL IN

COAXIAL 1-6)

1.3 Vp-p, 110

Ω

(DIGITAL IN

(balanced) AES/EBU) (Option)

Video (DVD, VIDEO 1-5)

(Option)

1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(Composite Video)

1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(S Video, Y signal)

0.28 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(S Video, C signal)

Component (Option) 1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(Y)

0.7 Vp-p, 75

Ω

, P

)

Output Level and Impedance:

Audio

AUDIO 1-5: 200 mV, 470

Ω

(Tape 1/2/ Video

1/2/3 Rec Out)

100 mV, 470

Ω

(Zone 2/3 Out

(ﬁxed))

1 V, 470

Ω

(Zone 2/3 Out (variable))

PRE OUT A: 1 V, 470

Ω

(Front L/R, CENTER,

SURR L/R, SURR BACK or

Zone 2 L/R, SUB WOOFER)

PRE OUT B: 1 V, 470

Ω

(SUB WOOFER)

Video (Option)

VIDEO 1-4

(Composite Video): 1 Vp-p 75

Ω

(Monitor Out A/B,

Video 1/2/3 Rec Out, Zone 2/3

Out)

VIDEO 1-4

(S Video, Y signal): 1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(Monitor Out A/B,

Video 1/2/3 Rec Out)

VIDEO 1-4

(S Video, C signal): 0.28 Vp-p, 75 ohms (Monitor Out

A/B, Video 1/2/3 Rec Out)

COMPONENT VIDEO: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms (Y)

0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms (P

, P

)

Phono Overload: 120 mV RMS at 1,000 Hz, 0.5%

THD

Frequency Response:

Audio (CD in Direct mode) 5 Hz-100 kHz: +1/–3 dB

Video Component 10 Hz-50 MHz: +1/–3 dB

RIAA Deviation: 20-20 kHz: ±0.8 dB

Tone Control: ±12 dB at 50 Hz (Bass)

±12 dB at 1,000 Hz (Mid)

±12 dB at 20,000 Hz (Treble)

S/N (Direct mode): 80 dB (PHONO, IHF A, 5 mV

input)

95 dB (LINE, IHF A, 0.5V input)

Muting: Due to setup menu

Tuning frequency Range: 87.50 to 108.00 MHz, 200 kHz

steps

Usable Sensitivity:

Stereo 17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75

Ω

IHF)

23 µV (75

Ω

DIN)

Mono 11.2 dBf, 1.0 µV (75

Ω

IHF)

0.9 µV (75

Ω

DIN)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Mono 17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 ohms)

Stereo 37.2 dBf, 20.0 µV (75 ohms)

Capture Ratio: 2.0 dB

Image Rejection Ratio: 40 dB

IF Rejection Ratio: 90 dB

S/N:

Mono 76 dB, IHF

Stereo 70 dB, IHF

Alternate Channel Attenuation:

Mono 55 dB IHF

Selectivity: 50 dB DIN

AM Suppression Ratio: 50 dB

Harmonic Distortion:

Mono 0.2%

Stereo 0.3%

Frequency Response: 30 to 15,000 Hz, +/–1.0 dB

Stereo Separation: 45 dB at 1,000 Hz

30 dB at 100 to 10,000 Hz

Stereo Threshold: 17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75

Ω

)

Tuning frequency Range: 530 to 1710 kHz, 10 kHz steps

Usable Sensitivity: 30 µV

Image Rejection Ratio: 40 dB

IF Rejection Ratio: 40 dB

S/N: 40 dB

THD: 0.7%

154

Speciﬁcations

– Other than USA and Canadian models –

General

Ampliﬁer Section

Power Supply Rating:

European & Australian models:

AC 230-240 V, 50 Hz

Asian models: AC 220-230 volts, 50 Hz

AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Consumption Power:

European & Australian models:

100 W

Asian models: 100 W

Standby Power Consumption: 3.9 W

Dimensions (W

D): 450

197.3

477.1 mm

(17 11/16"

7 3/4"

18 13/16")

Weight: 21.7 kg (47.8 lbs)

Inputs:

Audio

Multichannel (7.1ch) Inputs: 1

Phono (MM): 1

Line inputs: 9 (assignable)

Digital inputs Coaxial: 6

Digital inputs Optical: 6 (assignable)

Digital inputs AES/EBU 1

Video (Option)

Composite Video inputs: 6 (assignable)

S Video inputs: 6 (assignable)

Component Video RCA

inputs: 3

Component Video BNC

input: 1

Audio and Video

HDMI inputs (19-pin): 2

Miscellaneous

IR in (1/8-inch mini-jack): 3 (for Main, Zone 2 and Zone 3)

Outputs:

Audio

Balanced Pre out A: Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,

Surround Back L/R, Subwoofer

Unbalanced Pre out A: Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,

Surround Back L/R, Subwoofer

Unbalanced Pre out B: Subwoofer

Headphones: 1

Line outputs: 5 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out

and Zone 3 out)

Digital outputs Coaxial: 2 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out

and Zone 3 out)

Digital outputs Optical: 2 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out

and Zone 3 out)

Video

Composite Video outputs: 3 (assignable to Monitor out A/B,

Recout, Zone 2 out and Zone 3 out)

1 (ﬁxed, Monitor out A)

S Video outputs: 3 (assignable to Monitor out A/B

and Recout)

1 (ﬁxed, Monitor out A)

Component Video RCA

outputs: 1

Component Video BNC

output: 1

Audio and Video

HDMI output (19-pin): 1

Miscellaneous

IR out (1/8-inch mini-jack): 3 (for Main, Zone 2 and Zone 3)

12V Trigger out (1/8-inch

mini-jack): 5 (for A, B, C, D, E)

Inputs/Outputs:

Miscellaneous

i. LINK(AUDIO) (4 pin): 2

Ethernet (Net-Tune): 1 (option)

(1/8-inch mini-jack): 1

RS232 (9 pin D-SUB

Female connector): 1

Antennas:

FM: 75 ohms unbalanced

AM: Included loop antenna and external

terminal

AC Inlet: 1 (IEC type)

THD (Total Harmonic Distor-

tion): 0.05% (1 Vrms output)

Input Sensitivity and Impedance:

Audio 200 mV, 50 k

Ω

(AUDIO IN 1-9)

2.5 mV, 50 k

Ω

(PHONO MM)

200 mV, 50 k

Ω

(MULTI IN FR/FL/

C/SR/SL/SBR/SBL)

36 mV, 50 k

Ω

(MULTI IN SUB)

0.5 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(DIGITAL IN

COAXIAL 1-6)

1.3 Vp-p, 110

Ω

(DIGITAL IN

(balanced) AES/EBU)

Video (DVD, VIDEO 1-5) 1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(Composite Video)

1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(S Video, Y signal)

0.28 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(S Video, C signal)

Component 1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(Y)

0.7 Vp-p, 75

Ω

, P

)

Output Level and Impedance:

Audio

AUDIO 1-5: 200 mV, 470

Ω

(Tape 1/2/ Video

1/2/3 Rec Out)

100 mV, 470

Ω

(Zone 2/3 Out

(ﬁxed))

1 V, 470

Ω

(Zone 2/3 Out (variable))

PRE OUT A: 1 V, 470

Ω

(Front L/R, CENTER,

SURR L/R, SURR BACK or

Zone 2 L/R, SUB WOOFER)

PRE OUT B: 1 V, 470

Ω

(SUB WOOFER)

Video

VIDEO 1-4

(Composite Video): 1 Vp-p 75

Ω

(Monitor Out A/B,

Video 1/2/3 Rec Out, Zone 2/3

Out)

VIDEO 1-4

(S Video, Y signal): 1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

(Monitor Out A/B,

Video 1/2/3 Rec Out)

VIDEO 1-4

(S Video, C signal): 0.28 Vp-p, 75 ohms (Monitor Out

A/B, Video 1/2/3 Rec Out)

COMPONENT VIDEO: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms (Y)

0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms (P

, P

)

Phono Overload: 120 mV RMS at 1,000 Hz, 0.5%

THD

Frequency Response:

Audio (CD in Direct mode) 5 Hz-100 kHz: +1/–3 dB

Video Component 10 Hz-50 MHz: +1/–3 dB

RIAA Deviation: 20-20 kHz: ±0.8 dB

Tone Control: ±12 dB at 50 Hz (Bass)

±12 dB at 1,000 Hz (Mid)

±12 dB at 20,000 Hz (Treble)

S/N (Direct mode): 80 dB (PHONO, IHF A, 5 mV

input)

95 dB (LINE, IHF A, 0.5V input)

Muting: Due to setup menu

155

Miscellaneous

Speciﬁcations – Other than USA and Canadian models –

—Continued

Tuner Section

Speciﬁcations and features are subject to change without

notice.

Tuning frequency Range: 87.50 to 108.00 MHz, 50 kHz steps

Usable Sensitivity:

Stereo 17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75

Ω

IHF)

23 µV (75

Ω

DIN)

Mono 11.2 dBf, 1.0 µV (75

Ω

IHF)

0.9 µV (75

Ω

DIN)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Mono 17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 ohms)

Stereo 37.2 dBf, 20.0 µV (75 ohms)

Capture Ratio: 2.0 dB

Image Rejection Ratio: 85 dB

IF Rejection Ratio: 90 dB

S/N:

Mono 76 dB, IHF

Stereo 70 dB, IHF

Alternate Channel Attenuation:

Mono 55 dB IHF

Selectivity: 50 dB DIN

AM Suppression Ratio: 50 dB

Harmonic Distortion:

Mono 0.2%

Stereo 0.3%

Frequency Response: 30 to 15,000 Hz, +/–1.0 dB

Stereo Separation: 45 dB at 1,000 Hz

30 dB at 100 to 10,000 Hz

Stereo Threshold: 17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75

Ω

)

Tuning frequency Range:

European & Australian models:522 to 1611 kHz, 9 kHz steps

Asian models: 522 to 1611 kHz, 9 kHz steps or

530 to 1710 kHz, 10 kHz steps

*selectable

Usable Sensitivity: 30 µV

Image Rejection Ratio: 40 dB

IF Rejection Ratio: 40 dB

S/N: 40 dB

THD: 0.7%

* 2 9 3 4 3 6 8 6 *

SN 29343686

Printed in Japan

D0411-1

ONKYO EUROPE UK Office

Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ

UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452

Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN

Integra Research Division of

Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124 http://www.onkyo.com/

Integra Research Division of

ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION

18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.

Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.integraresearch.com

ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH

Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY

Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555

http://www.eu.onkyo.com/

ONKYO CHINA LIMITED

Units 2102-2107, Metroplaza Tower I, 223 Hing Fong Road, Kwai Chung, N.T., HONG KONG

Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039

http://www.ch.onkyo.com/

Integra RDC 7.1 User Manual To The 1797e61f C155 4025 A7a0 3aacfb78b8b7

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation